JP6511092B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result.

  Conventionally, in pachinko gaming machines, a game is played based on the winning of the gaming ball to the start winning opening, and when the result of the game becomes a specific result mode, the special gaming state in which winning in the special fluctuation winning device becomes easy What occurs is common. In addition, a predetermined winning ball is provided by the game ball winning on the winning opening provided in the game area including the starting winning opening and the special variation winning device (for example, see Patent Document 1). .

JP, 2016-140468, A

  In such a gaming machine, there is a possibility that an act may be made to misidentify the game ball as if the game ball has won a prize and to try to obtain the right to execute the game or obtain the prize ball illegally. The object of the present invention is to reliably detect fraud.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is:
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
A game area where game balls can flow down,
A winning area provided in the gaming area and capable of winning a gaming ball;
A prize detection sensor capable of detecting a game ball that has won in the prize area;
A discharge sensor capable of detecting game balls discharged from the game area;
And control means for performing control based on detection signals from the winning detection sensor and the discharge sensor.
The control means
A total winning number counter that counts the number of detections by the winning detection sensor;
A total discharge number counter that counts the number of detections by the discharge sensor;
Calculating means for calculating a difference number which is a value where the value of the total winning number counter exceeds the value of the total discharging number counter,
Configured to notify occurrence of an abnormality when the difference number exceeds a predetermined number;
It is characterized in that the detection by the prize detection sensor is not reflected in the difference number until a predetermined grace period elapses from the detection by the prize detection sensor.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to detect fraudulently.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the composition of a collective display. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 1 display. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 2 display. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 2 display. It is a figure explaining composition of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the opening and closing pattern of special fluctuation winning a prize device. It is a figure explaining the opening and closing pattern of special fluctuation winning a prize device. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flow chart explaining timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining input processing. It is a flow chart explaining switch reading processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payment command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fraud & prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a production | presentation command setting process. It is a flow chart explaining game machine state check processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payment busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure starting opening switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 game processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining special processing 1 special processing. It is a flow chart explaining special processing 2 special processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining special drawing information setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart explaining distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining high probability change frequency number update processing. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing of the special figure 1 during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing of special figure 2 during fluctuation. It is a flow chart explaining the special figure 1 during change processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 during change processing. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing 1 during the special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing 1 during the special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing 2 during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing 2 during a special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the process under special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining the process under special figure 2 display. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining special processing 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special processing 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing 1 during the special winning opening open. FIG. 20 is a flowchart for describing a process shift setting process 2 during the special winning opening open process. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flow chart explaining big hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit fanfare middle processing. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit middle process. It is a flowchart explaining small hit residual ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hitting end processing. It is a flowchart explaining symbol change control processing. It is a flowchart explaining segment LED edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining starting opening 1 signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining symbol fixed frequency signal edit processing. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode at the time of switching of a main fluctuation design. It is a figure explaining the display mode of skip production. It is a time chart explaining skip production. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a skip production process. It is a flow chart explaining display change processing. It is a figure explaining the modification of a display. It is a time chart which shows an example of the output mode of external information. It is a time chart which shows an example of the output mode of external information. It is a flow chart explaining state display edit output processing. It is a flow chart explaining difference calculation processing. It is a flowchart explaining out number error monitoring processing. It is a figure explaining an example of change of a value of each counter field. It is a figure explaining the change pattern table in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the change pattern table in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting processing in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of change of a value of each counter field in the 2nd modification. It is a flow chart explaining winning number counter update processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the state display edit output process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the state display edit output process in a 3rd modification. It is a flow chart explaining winning number counter update processing in the 4th modification. It is a flow chart explaining difference calculation processing in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the state display edit output process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the out number error monitoring process in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of change of a value of each counter field in the 4th modification.

First Embodiment
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are internally incorporated on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration or effect, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a delivery abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. has an abnormality notification color (for example, red , And a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting a sound (for example, a sound effect). Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a lamp for notifying a dispensing abnormality may be provided on a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

  In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (reserved plate) for supplying gaming balls to a bat firing device (not shown) and gaming balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 There are provided an upper flat ball outlet 22 which flows out, a lower tray (a tray) 23 for storing gaming balls dispensed in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a hitting launch device, and the like. Further, at the upper edge portion of the upper tray 21, a presentation button 25 incorporating a presentation button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided. Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25 A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Also, to the right of the effect button 25, the ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball loan from the adjacent ball lending machine, and the discharge button operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device is supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming ball 32 toward the gaming area 32 on the front of the gaming board 30. To fire. In addition, the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to perform an operation or the like in which the player operates in the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. Further, on the left side of the gaming area 32, a guiding wall 491 is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 and forms a guiding path 490 for guiding the shot gaming ball to a predetermined position of the gaming area 32.

  In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41 and to project forward than the display surface of the display device 41 to make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (brown tube). In the area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character producing a special view variation display game, a background image enhancing a rendering effect . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variable display), and a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game is performed. In addition, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, and the like) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen. In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that performs a game effect by operating. The panel rendering device 44 is operable toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

  On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common drawing start gate) 34 is provided which gives a start condition of the common drawing variation display game. The game ball that has won the common drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 12). Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, two general winning openings 35 are arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 12).

  Below the center case 40, the first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) and the second special view fluctuation display for giving the start condition of the first special view fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) There is provided a winning device 90 having a second start winning opening 97 (start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of a game (special figure 2 variation display game). The winning device 90 includes a distributing member 92 which alternately distributes the gaming balls having flowed into the inflow port 91 at the upper portion into the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97. The distributing member 92 is pivotable about a pivoting axis along the front-rear direction, and the tilting direction changes according to the weight of the game ball flowing in, and the first start winning hole 36 on the left and the second on the right The game balls are distributed alternately to the start winning opening 97. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 12), and the gaming ball that has won the second start winning opening 97 has the start opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 12) Detected by Further, below the winning device 90, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that have not been won in a winning port or the like.

  Further, on the right side of the center case 40, a normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the second special view fluctuation display game is provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened to allow gaming balls to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the right, and this movable member 37b is always It is almost vertical and keeps the closed closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) to which the game ball can not flow. Then, when the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the upper end side is turned so that the upper end side falls to the right by the common electric solenoid 37c (refer to FIG. 12) as a driving device The game ball can easily change into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 12). In addition, it is possible to be able to win even when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the closed state, and in the closed state, it may be harder to win than the open state.

  On the right side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a flow-down path 615 covered with a transparent cover on the front side and communicating with the upper and lower is formed, and gaming balls that did not win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 pass downward through the flow-off path 615 Flow down. Below the flow passage 615, a guiding portion 616 is provided. The guiding portion 616 is an inclined surface where the upper surface 617 falls to the left, and the gaming ball falling downward is received by the upper surface 617 so as to be guided to the left where the special fluctuation winning device 38 is present. Further, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 for displaying information related to the special figure variation display game.

  The information display device 630 is a first information display unit that displays the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special view variable display game, and the second start memory, which is the right to execute the second special view change display game. A second information display unit for displaying the number of In addition, the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation display game is displayed by the fourth symbol separately from the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed by the display device 41 by the first to third symbols. The decoration special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the 2nd special figure fluctuation display game with the 4th design separately from the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed with the 1st-3rd symbol with the 3rd information display part or the display device 41 A fourth information display unit for displaying a display game is provided.

  The first information display unit and the second information display unit are each configured by two light emitting members, and the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit are each configured by one light emitting member. In the second display device, these six light emitting members are arranged side by side in two rows, three on each side. The upper two light emitting members in the right row constitute a first information display unit, and the upper two light emitting members in the left row constitute a second information display unit. The lower one light emitting member in the right row constitutes a third information display unit, and the lower one light emitting member in the left row constitutes a fourth information display unit.

  Although the first information display unit and the second information display unit are each configured by two light emitting members, a design is applied around the respective information display units to show that the two light emitting members are related. At first glance, it can be understood that one light emitting member constitutes one information display unit. In addition, although the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit are each configured by one light emitting member, the designs around these information display units are designed to be independent. At first glance, it can be understood that the information display unit is constituted by one light emitting member. The design around the light emitting member is considered to have a sense of unity with the design of the entire game machine so that the aesthetic appearance is not lost. In addition, the design around the light emitting member is not the one to which a seal or the like is attached, but is formed to a member constituting the guiding portion 616, which can reduce the labor and cost at the time of manufacturing.

  Furthermore, in the lower right portion of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32, a first special variation winning device (upper prize winning opening) that can be converted to a state of not accepting or readily accepting a gaming ball according to the result of the special view variation display game. 38 are provided. The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker type opening / closing member 38c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game The opening / closing member 38c is retracted from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) when the opening / closing member 38c closes the upper large winning opening, and the open state (advantagel to the player) can receive the game ball flowing down the game area 32 State)). That is, the first special variation winning device 38 has a large winning opening that is opened and closed by the opening and closing member 38c driven by the large large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 12) as a drive device, and the special gaming state (based on big hit) During the first special game state and the second special game state based on small hits), the flow of the game ball into the large winning hole is made easy by converting the upper large winning opening from the closed state to the open state. , The predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition (upper prize winning area) (upper winning area), the upper winning a prize opening switch (count switch) 38a (see Figure 12) as a detection means to detect the game ball that has entered the upper big winning prize opening It is done.

  Further, below the first special variation winning device 38, a second special variation winning device (lower large winning opening) 39 that can be converted to a state of not accepting the game ball and a state of being easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. Is provided. The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker type opening / closing member 39c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and as a result of the special view variation display game as an auxiliary game The open / close member 39c is retracted from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) when the open / close member 39c closes the lower large winning opening and the open state (advantagel to the player) can receive the game ball flowing down the game area 32 State)). That is, the second special variation winning device 39 is provided with a lower large winning opening that is opened and closed by the opening and closing member 39c driven by the lower large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 12) as a drive device, special gaming state (based on big hit During the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state based on small hits), the flow of gaming balls into the lower large winning opening is facilitated by converting the lower large winning opening from the closed state to the open state. , The predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. A lower winning prize opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 12) is provided inside the lower winning prize opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the lower winning prize opening. It is done.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is taken as the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is taken as the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the power to shoot the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike) to the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the general winning opening 35 of the winning device 90. The player can aim for a prize, and shoots the game ball to the right side game area (so-called right hit) by the common drawing start gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, the first special fluctuation winning apparatus 38, the second special fluctuation winning apparatus It is possible to aim for the prize to 39.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, at the lower right of the game board 30), a special figure 1 variation display game for making a special figure variation display game or a batch of special information 2 variation display game displays and various information A display device 50 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display for a special view 1 variation display game configured of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like (first special view variation display unit) 51 (D1) and the special figure 2 display for the special view 2 change display game (second special view change display part) 52 (D2), start figure number notification of the special view 1 change display game composed of the LED lamp A special view 1 suspension display 54 (D11, D12) for the special view 2 and a special view 2 suspension display 55 (D13, D14) for notifying the start memory number of the special view 2 variation display game.

  In addition, the round display unit 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the big hit (the number of opening and closing of the first special fluctuation winning apparatus 38 or the second special fluctuation winning apparatus 39) on the collective display device 50; The first gaming state display unit 76 (D9) that indicates whether it is in the special game state during the general power support, the first that reports how to hit corresponding to the game situation among the left strike (normal strike) and the right strike A second gaming state display unit 77 (D8) is provided as an informing means. In addition, a third gaming state display unit (third gaming state indicator, probability state display unit) 78 (D17) is provided to display that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. It is done. Further, the batch display device 50 includes a common drawing indicator 74 (D10, D18) for a common drawing fluctuation display game, and a common drawing reservation indicator 75 (D15, D16) for notifying a start memory number of the common drawing fluctuation display game. Equipped with

  The special view variation display game in the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 is, for example, the middle of the variation display game, ie, while the decorative special view variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 ms. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, in the special view 1 fluctuation display game in the special view 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. 3B, in addition to the central segment, it is provided on the lower side of 7 segments rightward The eighth segment is also driven to blink to indicate that it is changing, so that it is possible to distinguish between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In addition, a plurality of identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the special figure variation display game may be sequentially displayed to indicate that the variation is in progress. Then, when the result of the game is "detachment", for example, the central segment (in addition to the special segment 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on as a result mode of the declination, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the game result is displayed with the result mode (e.g., numbers and symbols) other than the result mode of the offset being on as the hit result mode (special result mode).

  The special figure 1 reserve display 54 sets the number of undivided balls (the number of first start memories = the number of reserve) among the number of winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36 which becomes the variation start condition of the special figure 1 indicator 51 As shown in FIG. 3C, display is performed by turning off and lighting (flickering) a plurality of LEDs. The special figure 2 reserve display 55 is the number of undigested balls among the number of winning balls to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and the second start winning hole 97 which become the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52 (second start memory The number (number of holdings) is displayed by turning off and lighting (flickering) the plurality of LEDs as shown in FIG. 3 (c). The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and is selected according to the result during the special game state as shown in FIG. 3 (d) Turn on the LED according to the number of rounds. The round display unit may be configured by a 7-segment display.

  As shown in FIG. 3E, the first gaming state display unit 76 turns on the LED when it is in the time saving state, and turns off the LED when it is not in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 3 (e), the second gaming state display unit 77 turns off the LED in the case of the left hitting gaming situation (normal hitting), and in the case of the right hitting gaming situation (right hitting ) Turn on the LED. As shown in FIG. 3E, the third gaming state display unit 78 turns on the LED when the power is on in the high probability state, and turns off the LED if it is not in the high probability state.

  During the fluctuation display of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing fluctuation display game in the common drawing display 74 alternately changes the symbol number for fluctuation shown in FIG. 3 (g) and turns on two LEDs alternately. Display that it is changing. When the result is hit, it is turned on in a lighting mode according to the type of the light to indicate that it is hit, and when the result is out, it is turned off to indicate that it is not. . The common drawing reserve display 75 sets the undigested number of balls (the common drawing start memory number = the number of reservations) of the passing ball numbers of the common drawing start gate 34 serving as the fluctuation start condition of the common drawing display 74 as shown in FIG. As shown in f), display is performed by turning off and on (flashing) a plurality of LEDs.

  FIG. 4 shows a display mode on the special view 1 display unit 51. During the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game, the central segment and the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of 7 segments are blinked in a cycle of 100 ms. Then, the result is displayed by lighting in a mode corresponding to the result with the end of the fluctuation time. There is also a case where a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, any one lighting mode is selected from among these by a random number or the like.

  5 and 6 show display modes on the special view 2 display 52. FIG. During the variable display of the special view 2 variable display game, the central segment blinks at a cycle of 100 ms. Then, the result is displayed by lighting in a mode corresponding to the result with the end of the fluctuation time. There is also a case where a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, any one lighting mode is selected from among these by a random number or the like.

  FIG. 7 shows the probability of the big hit and the small hit, the distribution probability of the big hit type when the big hit is won, and the distribution probability of the small hit type when the small hit is won. Note that the jackpot is a special result (first special result) involving the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not involving the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view fluctuation display game (big hit symbol stop display), and when the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and the first as a special motorized role It means that a specific flag for successively operating the special fluctuation winning device 38 or the second special fluctuation winning device 39 is set (the bonus continuous operating device is activated). If the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

  The big hit probability, which is the probability of being a big hit (first special result), is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the probability in the normal gaming state which is the low probability state and the specific gaming state which is the high probability state is shown in FIG. The probability is as shown in 7 (a). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the special game state based on the big hit (the first special game state) is in high probability state, and when the special figure fluctuation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 50 times) It is configured to be In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result figure of the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are high probability states.

  The small hit probability, which is the probability of being a small hit (second special result), is a probability as shown in FIG. 7 (b). The small hit probability is lower in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. As a result, during the high probability state in which the special view 2 variation display game is mainly executed, small hits frequently occur and the flow of the game is not interrupted. Also, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state or the big hit probability. In the jackpot and jackpot lottery, the jackpot and the jackpot are not won in duplicate.

  Also, FIG. 7 (c) shows the jackpot types selectable in the special view 1 and the special view 2, and the special fluctuation winning device and distribution probability opened in each jackpot type, and FIG. 7 (d) shows the special 1 and 2 show the selectable small hit types, the special variation winning device opened with each small hit type, the opening time and the number of opening times, and the distribution probability. In addition, although it is a big hit about 2R probability variation D1 of special figure 2, since it is a big hit, the number of the special figure change display games which can be performed in a high probability state is set again 50 times. In the special gaming state based on the 2R probability variation D1, an effect is provided such that the number of games that can be executed in the high probability state is added.

  8 and 9 show fluctuation patterns of the special figure fluctuation display game. FIG. 8 shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in which the types of fluctuation patterns and the selection rates in the normal gaming state (low probability state) are defined. Note that a variation pattern table common to the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game is used.

  FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern table used in the case where the number of starting memories is 1 to 3 in the case where the result is out. The starting memory number here is the total number of the first starting memory and the second starting memory number. When the number of starting memories is 4 or more, the selectivity with no reach 3000 ms or 7000 ms, which is a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time, is increased, and the selectivity with other fluctuation patterns with a long fluctuation time is decreased It is being done.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is obtained, derivation is already made at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed display results satisfy the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same The state where the identification information is obtained, but excluding the special result aspect) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as reach effects such as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. Expected values are set to increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  FIG. 8B shows a variation pattern table used when the result is a big hit (first special result). In the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the number of starting memories. Also, in the case of a big hit, it is always in reach condition. FIG. 8C shows a variation pattern table used when the result is a small hit (second special result). The small hit is the same as the big hit, and the fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the number of starting memories. In addition, in the case of small hit is always reach state.

  FIG. 9 shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in which the type of fluctuation pattern and the selection rate in the specific gaming state (high probability state) are defined. Note that a variation pattern table common to the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game is used.

  FIG. 9A shows a variation pattern table used in the case where the number of starting memories is 1 to 3 in the case where the result is out. The starting memory number here is the total number of the first starting memory and the second starting memory number. When the number of starting memories is 4 or more, the selectivity with no reach, 1000 ms or 2000 ms, which is a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time, is increased, and the selectivity of the other fluctuation patterns with a long fluctuation time is decreased. It is being done. In FIGS. 9B and 9C, a variation pattern table used when the result is a big hit (first special result) and a variation pattern used when the result is a small hit (second special result) I showed a table. In the case of a big hit or a small hit, the variation pattern is selected regardless of the number of starting memories.

  In FIGS. 10 and 11, special game state (first special game state) based on the big hit (first special result) and special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit (second special result) are shown. The opening and closing pattern of the variable winning device is shown. FIG. 10 shows the opening and closing patterns of the special variation winning device in the big hit type and small hit type selectable in the special view 1 variable display game, and FIG. 11 shows the big hit type and small selectable in the special view 2 variable display game. The opening and closing pattern of the special variation winning device in the hit type is shown.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10, when the big hit type becomes a big hit of 16R definite variation A1 in the special figure 1 variable display game, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened according to the special figure 1 large winning opening opening and closing pattern 1 . In the special figure 1 upper prize winning opening opening and closing pattern 1, an opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R) after a fan far period of 5000 ms. Thereafter, a round in which an interval period of 2000 ms and an open period of 29000 ms are set is repeated to perform up to 16 rounds, and the special gaming state ends after the ending period of 11000 ms.

  The time described in the interval period and the ending period in each opening and closing pattern shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 is a time obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time and the interval time or the ending time. For example, the interval period in the special figure 1 large winning a prize opening opening and closing pattern 1 is 2000 ms, 1400 ms of the first half is the remaining ball processing time, and 600 ms of the second half is the interval time. In addition, the ending period in the special figure 1 large winning a prize opening opening and closing pattern 1 is 11000ms, 1400ms of the first half is the remaining ball processing time, 9600ms of the second half is the ending time.

  The other opening and closing patterns include a fanfare period, an opening period, an interval period (including the remaining ball processing time) and an ending period (including the remaining ball processing time) as shown in the drawing, and accordingly the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39 is opened. The special prize winning opening / closing pattern 5 on the special figure 2 of FIG. 11 is configured by repeating the opening period of 27200 ms in 5R for 200 ms and closing for 1500 ms 11 times and then opening for 25000 ms. Also, in any of the opening and closing patterns, when there is a prescribed number of winnings in each round, the open period of the round ends at that time.

  In addition, for example, when the opening and closing pattern is the same from the start of the special game state to the middle like the special figure 1 upper large winning opening opening and closing patterns 1 to 3 and the special drawing 2 upper large winning opening opening opening and closing pattern 2, 3 The effect in the device 41 may be the same so that it is difficult to determine the type of big hit or small hit. In addition, it may be possible to suggest or notify information enabling determination of the type of big hit or small hit during the special game state.

  In addition, when the big hit is executed by either of special figure 2 large winning a prize opening opening and closing pattern 4 and 5, the effect of whether the long opening round is executed again after the end of 4R (whether to continue or not) You may do so. In this case, for example, if special pattern 2 large winning a prize opening opening and closing pattern 4 short opening is performed from 5R to the final round 16R and big hit is finished, if special drawing 2 large winning a prize opening opening and closing pattern 5 is 5R After the short opening which is substantially the same as 5R to 16R of the special winning a prize opening / closing pattern 4 described above is performed in the long opening (25000 ms) is performed after the short opening is performed. . Therefore, using the time between 5R and 15R for the special figure 2 large winning opening / closing pattern 4 and the multiple short opening times of 5R for the special drawing 2 upper winning opening / closing pattern 5 Continuous effect is performed, if it is special figure 2 large winning a prize opening opening and closing pattern 4, it announces the result of long open not being resumed (big hit game does not continue), if it is special drawing 2 large winning a prize opening opening and closing pattern 5 The expectation of the player may be satisfied by notifying the result that the long opening resumes (the big hit game continues).

  From the above, in the special result, the first special result (big hit) which can generate the first special game state, and the second special game in which the game value which can be given to the player is lower than the first special game state. The second special result (small hit) that can generate the condition is included.

  In the following description, when the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as a special view change display game. When the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as the decorative special figure fluctuation display game. Also, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a hit (special result). Further, when the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special gaming state.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by striking a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The game balls that have been launched flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by turning members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and a general winning opening 35, which forms a winning area, Whether the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97 of the winning device 90, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the first special fluctuation winning device 38 or the second special fluctuation winning device 39, or the bottom of the game area 32 Flowed into the out port 30 a provided in the game room and discharged from the game area 32. Then, the game ball is in the general winning opening 35, the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97 of the winning device 90, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the first special fluctuation winning device 38 or the second special fluctuation winning device 39 When winning, the number of winning balls according to the type of winning opening is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 12) to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15. .

  The winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36 are detected as starting winning balls for the special view 1 variation display game by the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided internally, and the predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) is stored as the first starting memory. ) Are stored to the limit. When the game ball is won in the first start winning opening 36 in a state where the special view 1 variation display game can be started and the first start memory number is 0, the first start memory along with the generation of the start right Is stored, and the first start memory number is incremented by one, and the special view 1 variable display game is started immediately based on the first start memory, at which time the first start memory number is decremented by one. . On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variation display game can not be started immediately, for example, the special figure 1 variation display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variation display game has not ended, or the special gaming state is set. If the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36, the first start memory number is incremented by one and the first start memory is stored if the first start memory number is less than the upper limit number. . Then, in a state where the first start memory number becomes 1 or more, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game can be started (when the previous special figure 1 fluctuation display game is ended or the special gaming state is ended), the first While the number of starting memories is decremented by one, the special view 1 variation display game is started based on the stored first starting memories.

  The winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97 is detected as a starting winning ball for the special view 2 variation display game by the starting opening 3 switch 97a provided inside. In addition, the winning ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected as a starting winning ball for the special view 2 variable display game by the start opening 2 switch 37a provided inside. When there is a winning on the second start winning opening 97 or the normal variation winning device 37 in a state where the special view 2 variation display game can be started, the special view 2 variation display game is immediately executed based on the winning combination. . Also, when the special figure 2 variable display game can not be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variable display game is already performed and the special figure 2 variable display game is not finished, or when it is in the special game state If the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 97 or the normal variation winning device 37, if the second start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the second start memory number is incremented by one and the second start memory is one. It will be stored. Then, when the state of the second start memory number becomes 1 or more, when the special figure 2 variable display game can be started (when the previous special figure 2 variable display game is ended or the special gaming state is ended), the second The start memory number is decremented by one, and the special view 2 variation display game is started based on the stored second start memory.

  In addition, when the start winning ball is detected, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information, respectively, and the extracted random value is within the gaming control device 100 (see FIG. 12). The special map storage area (a part of the RAM) is stored as a special map start storage up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times for each of the first start storage and the second start storage). The number of storages of the special view start storage is displayed on the special view 1 reserve display 54 and the special view 2 reserve display 55 of the collective display unit 50, and the decorative special view is also displayed on the display 41 of the center case 40. It is displayed as a start memory display.

  The game control apparatus 100 performs a special view 1 change display game with the special view 1 display 51 (first change display device) based on the first start storage, and based on the second start storage, the special view 2 display A special figure 2 variable display game is played at 52 (second variable display device). The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the other special figure fluctuation display game has a special result (big hit or small hit) When it becomes, the one special figure fluctuation display game is ended as a result other than the special result (a result of losing).

  In the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52, after the variation display is performed in the display manner as shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, the predetermined result manner as shown in FIG. Stop display. And, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes the special result aspect (big hit result aspect) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes big hit, and it becomes 1st special game state (so-called big hit state). Also, when the result of the special view variation display game is a small hit, the special result mode in which the display mode of the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode) It becomes a small hit and becomes the second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special view 1 display 51 forms a first change display means capable of displaying a first change display game (special view 1 change display game) based on the winning of the game ball on the first start winning opening 36. Also, a second variation capable of displaying a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 or the second starting winning opening 97 Make a display means.

  In addition, in response to execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the display device (image display device) 41 fluctuates and displays a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) A special figure variation display game to be performed is to be executed. The decoration special figure variation display game includes an decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and an decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, as described later In addition, one set as a main display symbol is displayed larger than the other. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special view variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special view variation display game.

  That is, an ornament variation display game (variation display of ornament identification information corresponding to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) The decoration variation display means can be displayed to display the decoration special figure variation display game). Note that separate display devices may be used in the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Further, the special view variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10.

  Then, when a big hit occurs and the special game state is established, the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 can be aimed by right-handing. After the end of the special gaming state based on the jackpot, it becomes a specific gaming state that is a high probability state. In this specific gaming state, the probability of becoming a hit result in the special figure variation display game is a high probability state in which the probability is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure even in the high probability state based on the result form of the special figure fluctuation display game of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  Furthermore, in the specific gaming state, time-shortening of the probability of becoming a hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game (general drawing probability) to be a high probability (general drawing high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general drawing low probability state) It becomes a state. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is larger than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the low probability state. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 in the present embodiment, the drawing probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 ms, When the common game variation display game hits and results in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 being opened, the opening time of the first hit stop symbol (general electric station opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms × 1 time), The opening time of the second stop symbol (general power opening time) and the number of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 2 times), the third opening time of the stopping symbol (general power opening time) and the number of opening (for example, 1700 ms × It can be set to be 3 times).

  In addition, the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of general electric power release, and the general electric power release time are appropriately set to perform control to set the common fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the short time operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (general drawing fluctuation time) of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above to be a second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time. (For example, 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Moreover, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is 704 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (the general public opening time) is the normal state (general drawing low probability state) It is possible to control to become the 2nd opening time longer than 1 opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Also, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, four times). Also, in the time saving state, the probability of becoming a hit result of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing probability) is higher than the normal probability (general drawing low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to have a probability (generally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

  In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of common power release times, the common power release time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. In the case of a hit, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

FIG. 12 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main substrate) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and a gaming microcomputer 111 (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). And an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference clock for the CPU operating clock or timer interrupt and a random number generation circuit. An oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like is generated. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply apparatus 400 to be operable Be done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V and a DC-DC converter that generates DC voltages of 12 V and 5 V lower than DC voltage of 32 V. A power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure, having a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 111 at power failure and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are targets of replacement at the time of model change, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a substrate different from the power supply 400 Can be removed from the target of replacement and cost reduction can be achieved.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a random access memory (RAM) 111C which can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariable information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start storage. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various A variation pattern random number for determining the variation display game execution time etc. in reach display or non-reach variation display, and a random number generation circuit for generating a collision random number etc for determining hit of the common drawing variation display game And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. There is.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result (big hit or small hit) of the special view variation display game or a probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special view variation display game as the current gaming state Status), the operation status of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 as the current gaming status (time-saving operation status (general power support status)), the number of starting memories, etc. Select and acquire the variation pattern table. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize balls. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and performs control for dispensing the ball.

  In the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, and a starting opening 2 switch in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 37a, starting opening 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning opening 97, gate switch 34a in the common view starting gate 34, winning opening switch 35a, first special variation winning device 38 upper winning opening switch 38a, second special It is connected to an out switch 98 which detects all the game balls (safe ball and out ball) which are shot to the lower big winning opening switch 39a and the game area 32 and finished the game from the variable winning device 39 and supplied from these switches. Interface chip that inputs a negative logic signal such as 11V at high level and 7V at low level and converts it to a 0V-5V positive logic signal Proximity I / F) 121 is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7 V-11 V, so the leads of the sensor or proximity switch are improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead is disconnected and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state as it has become and to output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the start opening 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the upper winning prize opening switch 38a and the lower winning prize opening switch The detection signal 39 a is input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio sensor 62, the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected, and the detection signal of the out switch 98 are input to the third input port 124. Be done. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud which is provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main substrate 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payment control device A signal indicating whether or not 200 can accept a command), a payout abnormal status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormal), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that the game ball is stored in the lower tray 23 by a predetermined amount or more (full)), a touch switch signal (input of a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the above and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test injection test apparatus is turned off. Is configured as. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done to the trial shot test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

  The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (upper large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the first special fluctuation winning device 38 and a solenoid for opening the second special fluctuation winning device 39 (lower large winning opening). A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open / close data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c which opens the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 and the solenoid 39b. The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  The output unit 130 also has a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information (1 signal for big hit, 2 signals for big hit, 3 signals for big hit and 4 signals for big hit) to the external information terminal board 71. It is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132. That is, the game control apparatus 100 serves as an output unit that outputs information to the outside of the gaming machine.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives open / close data signals of the upper large winning opening solenoid 38b, the lower large winning opening solenoid 39b, and the universal solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. The first driver (drive circuit) 138a, the second driver 138b for outputting the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the output from the fourth output port 136 The third driver 138c for outputting the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current lead-in side of the batch display device 50, and the external information terminal board for supplying the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device. A fourth driver 138 d for outputting to 71 is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 450. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 450 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

  Although not particularly limited, the start opening 1 switch 36 a in the first start winning opening 36, the start opening 2 switch 37 a in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, and the start opening 3 in the second start winning opening 97 The switch 97a, the winning opening switch 35a, the upper large winning opening switch 38a, the lower large winning opening switch 39a, and the out switch 98 have a coil for detecting magnetism, utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) for detecting a game ball is used. Also, a micro-switch having a mechanical contact on the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like and the body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 etc. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at power failure A FeRAM 323 which can be held, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, and instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights up the decoration lamp, and motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Also, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325 ) Is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, etc.) is transmitted via the command I / F 331 to the decoration special drawing reservation number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Receive as). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the information display device 630. The frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15 is provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls the panel effect device 44 (for example, a movable object or the like which enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if a frame rendering device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for presentation) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame rendering movable body control circuit for driving and controlling this frame rendering device is provided. good.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided in the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. To detect the on / off state of the effect combination product switch 47 (rendering motor switch) to detect the detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, generates voltage of DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are outputted from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In these control circuits, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning opening 36, the random number value etc. The first start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. A big hit determination random number value or the like of the first start storage is compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit deviation or variation pattern of the special view 1 variation display game is performed. In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a which is equipped to the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 and the starting opening 3 switch 97a which is equipped to the second starting winning opening 97 The random number value and the like for the big hit judgment of are extracted and the second starting memory is stored in the RAM 111C. A big hit determination random number value or the like of the second start storage is compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit out or variation pattern of the special view 2 variation display game is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special view 1 change display game or the special view 2 change display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52, processing is performed to display a special view variation display game which is stopped and displayed. That is, the variation display game is based on winning in the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the second start winning opening 97) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 by the game control apparatus 100. It constitutes game control means to control the progress.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  The CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52 when the result of the special view variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, and also the special game Perform processing to generate a state. In the processing for generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111A, for example, opens the opening / closing member 38c of the first special variation winning device 38 by the upper large winning opening solenoid 38b, and allows the game ball to flow into the upper winning opening. Control to Alternatively, the lower special winning opening solenoid 39b opens the opening / closing member 39c of the second special variation winning device 39, and performs control to enable the flow of gaming balls into the lower special winning opening.

  Then, until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls win in the special winning opening or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is The release (one round) is performed, and the control (cycle game) is performed to repeat (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

  In addition, the game control apparatus 100 can generate the specific gaming state as the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This specific gaming state is a high probability state and a time saving state (general power support state). Note that only one of the high probability state and the short time state may be generated, or none may be generated (a low probability state and no time reduction).

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main processing shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 and the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 18 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started by turning on the power. In this main processing, as shown in FIG. 14, a stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the values of registers etc. when an interrupt occurs after the processing for inhibiting the interrupt (step X1) is performed first Stack pointer setting processing (step X2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper order takes 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step X4. Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step X5). The release permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and processing for setting a power on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power-on delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. It can be detected. That is, when the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing that. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

  After the process of setting the power on delay timer (step X7), the process of measuring the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the waiting time (steps X8 to X12) are performed. First, set the number of times (for example, 2 times) to read the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 through the port and data bus and check it (step X8), and determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step X9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step X10; N), the process returns to the determination (step X9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited for. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11). Is determined (step X12). If the timer value is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, if the waiting time is over, access to read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X13) And) output OFF data to all output ports (set to a state without output) (step X14).

  Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X15) and read first. From the state of the first input port 122, it is determined whether the initialization switch is turned on (step X16).

  If the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example 5 Ah) (step X17), and normal (Step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), the checksum calculation processing for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19), and the calculated checksum and power off It is determined whether the checksums of the two match (step X20). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), the process proceeds to step X21 in FIG. 15 to perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure.

  In addition, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N) If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X23 in FIG. 15 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. I

  At step X21 in FIG. 15, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step X21). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area and an error fraud monitoring. The busy signal flag area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined.

  Thereafter, a command at the time of the power failure recovery corresponding to the special drawing status prepared to execute the special drawing game processing described later rationally is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step X22), Go to X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X22, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. As the screen designation command, if the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both under normal processing which will be described later, that is, if the special figure change display game is not being executed nor in the special game mode, The command of the waiting demo screen is transmitted, otherwise the command of the recovery screen is transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step X16, X17, X18 and X20 to step X23, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step X23), and all areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X24), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step X25). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X26). Here, the area to be initialized is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the effect mode. Then, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X27), and the process proceeds to step X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X27, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a command for RAM initialization (displaying a customer waiting demo screen and displaying light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) And transmit a plurality of commands such as a command for causing notification of the RAM initialization. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted.

  At step X28, processing for activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit for generating a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process of step X28, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step X29). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining symbols per special drawing After saving in a predetermined area of RWM as an initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) (step X30), an interrupt is permitted (step X31). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, initial value random number update processing (step X32) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" which is updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are timer interrupt processing units of program processing. It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the same cycle CTC output (CTC (CTC 2) different from CTC (CTC 0) of timer interrupt processing). Also, for the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value changing method" is employed in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every round of the random number. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random type update in which all the values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step X32, set the number of times (for example, 2) to read the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus and check (step X33) It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step X34). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X34; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step X32). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step X31) before the initial value random number update process (step X32), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, and in the case where such a method is adopted, the initial value random number update processing in step X32 above In order to prevent the value random number update process from being performed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. There is no problem in canceling the interrupt before the initial value random number update process if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed but is performed only in the main process, and the main process It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step X33 (step X35). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step X35; N), the process returns to the determination (step X34) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step X35; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily prohibiting an interrupt (step X36). A process of outputting off data to the output port (step X37) is performed.

  Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step X38), and the blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step X39). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process (step X40) for calculating a checksum at power-off of the RWM, and a process (step X41) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X42) ) And wait for the power to the game machine to shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

  Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of external operation, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization unit (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 16 shows the checksum calculation process (steps X19 and X40) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of RWM is set as the start value of the calculation address (step X51), the number of repetitions is set (step X52), and "0" is set as the calculation value (step X53). . The number of bytes of RAM being used is set to the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is taken as a new calculated value (step X54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step X55), and the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step X56). It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step X57). If the calculation has not been completed (step X57: N), the process returns to step X54 to repeat the above processing. When the calculation is completed (step X57: Y), the checksum calculation process is ended.

Initial Value Random Number Update Process
FIG. 17 shows the initial value random number updating process (step X32) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the jackpot symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X61), the small hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step X62), and the initial value random number update process is ended. Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol in the special figure variation display game, and "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special figure variation display game in the special pattern variation display game It is the random number which becomes the initial value of the random number which decides small hitting stop design. Thus, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt is generated in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically inhibited, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 18 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step X101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input from various sensors and switches, and taking in of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step X103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step X104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (upper large winning opening solenoid 38b, lower large winning opening solenoid 39b) is performed. In addition, when the signal of the firing stop is output in step X5 in the main process, the signal of the firing permission is output by performing the output process, and the firing permission signal is set to be in the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of release permission seen from the game control device, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating the state of release permission viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step X105) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step X106), and a random number update process 2 (step X107) are performed. Thereafter, whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from start opening 1 switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a, start opening 3 switch 97a, winning opening switch 35a, upper large winning opening switch 38a, lower large winning opening switch 39a A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108) is performed to monitor and monitor errors (whether or not the front frame or the glass frame is opened).

  Next, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step X109) is performed to monitor winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a and the starting opening 3 switch 37a. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the second starting winning opening 97. Then, a special figure 1 game process (step X110) that performs a process related to the special figure 1 change display game and a special figure 2 game process (step X111) that performs a process related to the special figure 2 change display game are performed.

  Next, segment LED editing processing (step X112) provided in the gaming machine 10 to drive the segment LED for displaying special information related to the display of special view variation display game and various information to display desired content (step X112), magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113), which performs processing to check the detection signal from the sensor to determine whether there is an abnormality, and board radio fraud that performs processing to check the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step X114) is performed. Furthermore, external information editing processing (step X115) is performed to set signals output to various external devices to the output buffer (step X115), and the number of game balls detected at the out switch 98 and the number of payouts based on winnings in the winning area A state display editing output process is performed to calculate a value (step X116), and the timer interrupt process is ended.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step X103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 19, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, ie, the first input port 122, is read (step X121). Then, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X122), and the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step X123).

Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step X124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step X125).
Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X126), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X127), and switch reading processing (step X128) is performed.

Thereafter, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step X129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step X130).
Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X131), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X132), switch reading processing (step X133) is performed, and input processing is ended.

  In the present embodiment, “prepare” means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory. Further, as information on the above-mentioned unused bit data and inverted bit data, information prepared corresponding to each input port is used.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (steps X128 and X133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step X141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X142), and the bit requiring inversion is inverted (step X143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Save (store) (step X144). Thereafter, it waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step X145).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step X146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X147), and the bit requiring inversion is inverted (step X148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Save (store) (step X149). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bit in the same state is 1 and the bit is 0 in the first and second readings (step X150), and the definite bit pattern and port input state 2 are logically ANDed. It is set as a fixed bit (step X151).

  Next, an indeterminate bit pattern is created in which the state is 0 for the same state and 1 for the other bit in the first and second reading (step X152), and the logic between the indeterminate bit pattern and the determined state at the previous interrupt The product is taken and it is set as the previously held bit (step X153). As a result, it is possible to obtain the state of a signal from which noise due to chattering of a switch or the like has been removed. Then, the currently decided bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved as the currently decided state (step X154), exclusive OR is performed between the previous and currently decided states, and saved as the rising edge (step X155), End the switch reading process.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch read changes the signal by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing with the result of the previous read. Although there is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been read, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost until the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that the correct determination can not be made. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step X104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 12) that outputs the data of the segment of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step X161). Next, data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 for outputting data of the upper large winning opening solenoid 38b and the lower large winning opening solenoid 39b are synthesized and output (step X162).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step X164), combine the acquired information and the external information data (step X165). Then, the synthesized data is output to the port 136 for digit output and the port 137 for external information output (step X166). Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step X167), and the loaded data is output to the port 135 for segment output (step X168).

  Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and synthesized (step X169), and the synthesized data and the output data of emission permission are synthesized (step X170), and the synthesized data is used for external information output Output to the port 137 (step X171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (Step X172). Thereafter, data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (Step X173).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 (Step X174). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal of the test shot tester is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 ( Step X 175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (Step X176), and the output process is finished. That is, the game control apparatus 100 serves as an output unit that outputs information to the outside of the gaming machine.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step X105) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prize for which the payout command has not been transmitted yet The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a winning ball command counter capable of storing information on the winning ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here 10). In the area to be used, data of winning corresponding to the winning balls not subjected to the generation processing of the main winning ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor fraudulent payments by collating these two signals.

  Each of these winning number counter areas is provided with a winning number counter area according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls). The count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning on the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, while transmission may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which the payout command is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 2 (step X181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, “0” in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number. Then, if there is no count number (step X181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X182), and it is determined whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. (Step X183). If it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step X183; Y) in this determination, the process proceeds to step X192. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X183; N), the process returns to step X181 to repeat the above processing.

  If it is determined in step X181 that there is a counted number (step X181; Y), the counted number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step X184), and the target winning number counter The number of payouts corresponding to the area is acquired (step X185). Then, the value of the winning ball remaining number area and the acquired payout number are added to obtain a new winning ball remaining number (step X186), and the game is saved in the winning ball remaining number area (step X187). In addition, as the value of the remaining number area of winning balls before this processing, a fraction which does not meet a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main winning ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, 10 which is a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the addition result (step X188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189). If the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step X189; N), the process proceeds to step X192. In this case, since the subtraction result is not saved in the winning ball remaining number area, the value before subtraction is stored in the winning ball remaining number area. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output number area is updated by +1 (step X190), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step X191) Return to step X188.

  As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined pay area. . In addition, when the payout of the game ball such as during a big hit is concentrated by outputting the main prize ball signal, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accurate occurrence occurred during the big hit It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of winning balls can not be counted.

  In step X192, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (step X193). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step X193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. When the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control, and the payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control can not be immediately started. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal makes a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (the payout control device 200) can start the payout control. The payout busy signal flag is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the status of the payout busy signal, and is an idle state where payout control can be started immediately Either a busy state in which control can not be started immediately or an undefined state in which the state is undefined is set.

  The undefined state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal flag area in the process when the power is turned on. In this undetermined state, the idle state or the busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time to indicate that the payout control can or can not be started immediately Eliminate it with That is, even if a status signal indicating that dispensing control can be started is output from the dispensing control device 200 when a power failure occurs and returns from the power outage, the winning ball command is immediately issued to the dispensing control device 200. In response to the status signal indicating that dispensing control can be started is continuously output over a predetermined period from the dispensing control device 200 without transmitting, a winning ball command is transmitted to the dispensing control device 200. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

  If the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. Here, also in the case of an undefined state, it is determined that it is busy. As described above, when the payout control device 200 can not immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform the useless processing by preventing the subsequent processing regarding the transmission of the payout command. We try to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  If the payout busy signal flag is not busy (step X194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 1 (step X195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, “0” in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number.

  Then, when there is no count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X196). It is determined whether the check of the count number is completed (step X197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step X197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X197; N), the process returns to step X195 to repeat the above processing.

  If it is determined in step X195 that there is a count in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step X198) A payout command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step X199). Then, the acquired command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step X200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step X201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms, for example, is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control output from the payout control means (the payout control device 200) indicates that the game control device 100 can start the payout control. In this case, the winning ball command transmitting means transmits the winning ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, since the game control apparatus 100 controls the game ball command to be transmitted based on the state signal output from the payout control apparatus 200, the award is made only when the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so when a power failure occurs, it will be backed up by the game control device 100 and backed up to the payout control device 200. Accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the function for

  In a conventional gaming machine (e.g., the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when the power is shut off due to some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before the power is shut off. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the cost increases because the function for backing up is required. According to the present invention, accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the dispensing control device 200 with a function for backup.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to an external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can pay out the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Further, since the prize ball instruction counter capable of storing information on the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing the information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball having different transmission timings Information on signals can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and the winning area (first start winning opening 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97, general winning opening 35, the first start winning opening 36 provided in the gaming area 32 1) A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting an award ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the special fluctuation winning device 38 and the second special fluctuation winning device 39), and a winning ball transmitted from the game control means The game control means is provided with a payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of the game ball based on the command, and the game control means can start the payout control which is output from the payout control means Control to transmit the winning ball command to the payout control means based on the status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the power failure occurs, and the payout control can be started from the payout control means when the power recovery is restored Indicate that there is Even if the status signal is output, the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is continuously output over a predetermined period from the payout control unit without immediately transmitting the winning ball command to the payout control unit. In response to the event, the winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, winning areas different in number of winning balls in the game area 32 (first start winning opening 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97, general winning opening 35, first special variation winning device 38, second special A plurality of variable winning devices 39) are provided, and the game control means (game control device 100) can specify the presence or absence of the non-transmission of the winning ball command instructing the payout control of the gaming ball for each winning ball number. (Game control apparatus 100), the state signal indicates that it is possible to start the payout control, and when there is an unsent award ball instruction in each award ball instruction counter, the payout control means It is transmitted to the payout control device 200), and the status signal indicates whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control, whether or not there is a winning ball command which has not been sent to each winning ball command counter. Should be done prior to the identification of .

  In addition, while overall game control is performed, the predetermined winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97, the general winning opening 35, the first special fluctuation winning device 38, the first 2) A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the special variation winning device 39), and a prize ball command based on the prize ball command sent from the game control means The game control means is provided with a payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control, and the game control means outputs a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control outputted from the payout control means. A payout is issued along with the winning of a game ball to a predetermined winning area, and a winning ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting a winning ball command to the payout control means when it indicates that control can be started. Number of winning balls determined External information output means (game control apparatus 100) for outputting a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including related information to the outside of the gaming machine, the external information output means being in a state of being outputted from the payout control means The signal is to output the winning ball signal regardless of whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control.

  In addition, even if the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) generates a power failure and returns from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicates that payout control can be started. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It will be transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the award ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing information on the award ball command and the information on the award ball signal (main award ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) has a predetermined winning area (first start winning opening 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, second start winning opening). The winning ball command is generated on the basis of one winning to the 97 general winning opening 35, the first special fluctuation winning device 38, the second special fluctuation winning device 39), and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started. When it is determined, one winning ball command is configured to be sent to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command counter (game control device 100) unites one winning in a predetermined winning area. Of the prize as Information can be stored, and the game ball is updated upon winning of the game ball to a predetermined winning area, and is also transmitted in response to transmission to the prize ball command to the payout control means, thereby not transmitting the prize ball The number of instructions can be stored, and the external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the gaming ball in the predetermined winning area, and the winning ball signal is generated each time the cumulative value reaches the predetermined number. Is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and the prize ball signal counter is capable of storing information of the prize in units of one prize in the predetermined prize area, and the game ball of the predetermined prize area By performing updating at the time of winning and updating according to the cumulative processing of the number of winning balls by the external information output means, it is possible to store the number of winning balls for which cumulative processing has not been performed yet.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 23 shows the random number updating process 1 (step X106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number which are targets of the initial value random number update process. In the random number updating process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X221).

  If the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; N), it is determined whether the small hitting symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224). If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X222), and the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number loaded corresponds The start value of the random number counter (random number area) is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value (step X223). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).

  If the small hitting symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended. If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X225), and the next initial step of the loaded small hit symbol random number The value is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step X226), and the random number updating process 1 is ended.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 24 shows the random number updating process 2 (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1 byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2 byte random number (variation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers, and both random update processing 2 Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach variation mode determination) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is performed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. Are configured to

  In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for specifying in order which random number of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the current update process is updated (step X231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step X232). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referred based on the calculated address (step X233). At this time, in the table to be referred to, an upper limit judgment value, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random number has made one round is stored for each type of random number.

  Subsequently, for example, the value of the M1 counter provided in the gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is loaded (step X234). The randomness can be given randomness by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is obtained, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step X235). The mask value is the number of bits different depending on the random number to be updated, for example, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit value is different depending on the type of random number. When the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter is updated. When the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower order of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited thereto.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236). Then, when the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X 236; Y), the value left by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value as the added value (hereinafter referred to as The mask update value is obtained by adding “1” to the masked value), and the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step X237), and the process goes to step X239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X 236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step X238), Go to step X239. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0", and adding "0" later does not change from the value before addition, so to avoid it. is there.

  Then, it is judged whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step X239; Y), the value (2-byte) of the random number area to be updated is set (step X240) Proceed to step X242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step X239; N), set “0” as the high-order 1 byte of the random number and the low-order 1 byte of the random value to the value of the random number area (1 byte) ) Is set (step X241), and the process proceeds to step X242.

  In step X242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step X237 or X238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit judgment value acquired in step X233 (step X243). Then, if the new random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X243; N), the new random number is saved in a lower random number area of 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step X245). If the new random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number is regarded as a new random number again (step X244). The data is saved in the lower random number area of the byte random number or 2-byte random number (step X245).

  Next, it is determined whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246). If it is not a 2-byte random number (step X246; N), the random number updating process 2 is ended. If the random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246; Y), the new random number value (when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the high-order random number area of the 2-byte random number (step X247). And the random number updating process 2 ends.

  As described above, the CPU 111A updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A, among the various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97, the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game ( It is a random number updating means for updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern).

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 25 shows the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one upper winning opening switch 38a in the upper large winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step X301). Even if the special winning opening is not open, the illegal / winning monitoring process (step X302) is performed to monitor whether the special winning opening has an illegal winning and to detect a normal winning.

  In the winning opening monitoring table (corruption monitoring table), a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data to determine whether there is an input on the target switch, a lower address of the fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the wrong number area, a wrong prize error The notification command, the upper limit value of the number of incorrect winnings (the number of incorrect determinations), the address of the winning opening switch table, and information of the notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. Further, in the winning opening switch table, information on the number of repetition of monitoring (number of switches), monitoring switch bit, address of winning number counter area 1, address of winning number counter area 2 is defined. The fraud monitoring table and the prize table are prepared according to the switches to be monitored.

  Thereafter, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower winning opening switch 39a in the lower winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) is prepared (step X303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step X304) for detecting a normal prize is executed. Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the general public (step X305), and monitor whether there is an incorrect winning and detect a normal winning while detecting the false & winning monitoring The (step X306) is executed.

  Then, prepare the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 3 switch 97a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) which can always win (step X307). The winning number counter updating process (step X308) to be updated is performed. Next, a state scan counter for specifying in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches whose state should be monitored and which signal is to be the target of the current monitoring is updated (step X309). This status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, according to the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step X310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X311) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

  By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like If set, and the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

  Next, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step X312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X313) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

  By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set, status scanning When the value of the counter is 1, monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is 0 (step X314). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X314; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is ended. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X314; Y), the gaming machine state check table 3 is prepared (step X315), and the state of the gaming machine is checked to determine whether an error has occurred. The process (step X316) is performed.

  By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like It is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step X317) is performed to set a busy signal flag based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is ended. Do. Since the processes of steps X315 to X317 are executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is 0, the process of steps X315 to X317 is executed once in four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps X315 to X317 are performed every 16 ms.

[Incorrect & prize monitoring process]
FIG. 26 shows the fraud & prize monitoring process (steps X302, X304, X306) in the above-mentioned prize hole switch / state monitoring process. In this fraud & prize monitoring process, each of the two upper prize opening switches 38a of the first special variation winning apparatus 38, the lower special winning port switch 39a of the second special variation winning apparatus 39, the starting opening of the normal variation winning apparatus 37 This process is performed on the second switch 37a. In these cases, since it is easy to be unfair to open the opening and closing member, insert the game ball, and pay out the prize ball, the fraud is monitored in addition to the detection of winning.

  In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step X321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is underway (step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special game state in which the first special variation winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch targeted for error monitoring is the upper large winning opening switch 38a, and the winning opening for error monitoring When the switch is the lower large winning opening switch 39a, it is a period other than the special gaming state in which the second special variation winning device 39 is opened. Also, when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is being executed on the basis of the drawing.

  Then, if it is a fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323). If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the target number of incorrect winnings is updated by +1 (step X324), and the number of incorrect winnings after the addition is the number of fraudulent occurrences to be monitored (for example, It is determined whether or not 5) is exceeded (step X325).

  For example, when the winning opening in the open state is converted to the closing state, the gaming ball is caught in the opening / closing member of the winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the winning opening switch. It is for not judging that it is illegitimate when it wins, or when noises appear on the signal, and it is because it is not easily determined as an error although it is not illegitimate.

  Then, if the judgment number is not exceeded (step X325; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330). If the number of judged winnings is exceeded (step X325; Y), the number of incorrect winnings is fixed to the number of false judgings (step X326), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target false winning notification timer area (step X 327). Next, a target fraudulent generation command is prepared (step X328), a fraudulent prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step X329), and the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step X340). ).

  On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330), and the winning number counter update process (step X331) for setting the winning balls is performed. . Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332), and it is determined whether or not the update permission of the notification timer is permitted (step X333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step X333; N), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. When updating of the notification timer is permitted (step X333; Y), if the notification timer of interest is not 0, it is updated by 1 (step X334). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch targeted for error monitoring is one of the large winning opening switches 38a, and permitted when the winning opening switch for errors monitoring is the other upper winning opening switch 38a. I will not. Thereby, with regard to the fraudulent notification about the first special variation winning device 38, the notification timer is updated twice as often, and it is prevented that time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms) . When the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the lower large winning opening switch 39a or the starting opening 2 switch 37a, updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335). If the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, prepare the target fraud release command (step X336), and set the fraud winning flag as the fraud flag. Prepare (step X 337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).

  If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (Step X 338; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the present fraud & prize monitoring process, the target number of wrong prizes is cleared ( Step X339), compare the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). Also, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X 338; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted The value of the incorrect flag area is compared (step X340).

  Then, when the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340; Y), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step X341), and rendering command setting processing is performed. (Step X342) The fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the occurrence of an error, and an incorrect prize error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 along with the release of the error, and the start and end of the error notification are set. It will be done.

[Winning number counter update processing]
FIG. 27 shows winning number counter updating processing (steps X308 and X331) in the above-described winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening switch table of the winning opening monitoring table (step X 351), and input to the target winning opening switch (exactly input change ) Is determined (step X352).

  If there is no input (step X352: N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X368), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (step X369). If there is an input (step X352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X354), and it is determined whether it overflows Step X 355). If no overflow occurs (step X 355; N), the updated value is saved in winning number counter area 1 (step X 356), and the value of target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X 357). ). If an overflow occurs (step X 355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X 357).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X 357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X 358), and it is determined whether the overflow occurs (step X 359). When an overflow occurs (step X359; Y), the process moves to step X361. If no overflow occurs (step X359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X360), and the process moves to step X361.

  At step X361, the value of the total winning number counter area for counting the total number of gaming balls won is loaded to each winning opening (step X361), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X362), and it is determined whether it overflows. (Step X363). Then, if no overflow occurs (step X363; N), the updated value is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X364). As a result, the game balls that have won a prize in each winning opening are counted, and the counting result is held. That is, the game control apparatus 100 is a winning detection sensor (starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, starting opening 3 switch 97a, upper large winning opening switch 38a, lower large winning opening switch 39a, winning opening switch 35a) Make a total winning number counter that counts the number of detections. Thereafter, a difference calculation process is performed to calculate the difference necessary for the determination of the out number error (step X365), and the process proceeds to step X368.

  The details of the difference calculation process and the error based on the difference will be described later, but the number of detections of the game balls at each winning opening is an out switch 98 for detecting all game balls that have been fired to the game area 32 and finished the game. It is a process which calculates the number which exceeded the detection number of game balls as a difference. If this difference exceeds a predetermined number, an out number error occurs.

  On the other hand, when an overflow occurs (step X363; Y), the value of the difference counter area is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X366), 0 is saved in the out counter area (step X367), and step X368. Migrate to The difference counter area is an area for storing the value of the above-mentioned difference, and the out counter area is an area for storing the number of detected gaming balls at the out switch 98. When the value of the total winning number counter area overflows, the values of the total winning number counter area and the out counter area are set as described above. The value of the difference counter area is maintained. As a result, the detection of the out number error is not inconvenient.

  Thereafter, the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X368), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (step X369). If monitoring of all switches has not ended (step X369; N), the process returns to the process (step X352) of determining whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X369; Y), the winning number counter updating process is ended. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 and the total winning number counter area are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the information on the winning is stored.

[Processing command setting process]
FIG. 28 shows rendering command setting processing (step X342) in the above-mentioned fraud & prize monitoring processing. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X371), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X372).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X372; Y), the process returns to step X371. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X372; N), the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step X373), and the status of the serial transmission buffer is read (step X374) It is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X375).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X 375; Y), the process returns to step X 374. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X 375; N), the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step X 376), and the effect command setting process is ended.

  As described above, since the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced, and analysis of the command can be made difficult. In addition, the timing of command transmission can be advanced, and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300 as well, it is not necessary to capture a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Pachislot machine state check process]
FIG. 29 shows the gaming machine state check process (steps X311, X313, X316) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this gaming machine status check process, first, a status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter is obtained (step X451), and it is determined whether a signal to be monitored is on (step X452).

  Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table. As this information, for example, the lower address of the head address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal Judgment data of ON, state OFF command (make error notification end command in case of error system), state ON command (make error notification start command in case of error system), state OFF monitoring timer comparison value, state ON monitoring timer Contains the comparison value.

  If the target signal is not on (step X452: N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step X453), and the state off command of the target is acquired and prepared (step X454). Thereafter, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X455), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459). If the target signal is not on (step X 452: N), it is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (is normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

  On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step X452: Y), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step X456), and the state on command of the target is acquired and prepared (step X457). Thereafter, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X458), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459). When the target signal is on (step X 452: Y), it is a state indicating that the error signal is an error (abnormal or incorrect), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. Is a state showing

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the current signal (step X459; Y), that is, if the state of the signal has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462) It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step X459; N), that is, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step X 460). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step X461), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462), and it is determined whether the target status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step X463).

  If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463; N), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. Further, when the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463: Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and the comparison value is held at the value of -1 (step X464). The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step X465).

  Then, if the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step X 465; Y), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step X465; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step X466), and the rendering command setting process is performed. Then (step X467), the gaming machine state check process is ended. As a result, the state off command prepared in step X454 or the state on command prepared in X457 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Discharge busy signal check process]
FIG. 30 shows the payout busy signal check processing (step X317) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing. In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step X471). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 can not start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is not on (step X471; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X472), and an off determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X473). If the payout busy signal is on (step X 471; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X 474), and an on determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X 475). .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area is the same as the state of the current signal, that is, it is determined whether there is a change of on or off (step X476). If it is the same (step X476; Y), The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479). If not (step X476; N), save the state of the current signal in the busy signal state area (step X477), clear the busy signal monitoring timer to 0 (step X478), and save the busy signal monitoring timer. +1 is updated (step X479).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is larger than the on-determined monitoring timer comparison value or the off-determined monitoring timer comparison value set previously, that is, whether the signal determination time (for example, 32 ms) is reached (step X 480). If the signal determination time has not been reached (step X480; N), the payout busy signal check process is ended. Also, when the signal determination time is reached (step X480; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and the value of -1 of the on determination monitoring timer comparison value or the off determination monitoring timer comparison value previously set. At step X481, the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step X482), and the payout busy signal check process is ended.

  By this processing, the busy signal flag is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, and the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and thus noise It is hard to be influenced by

  In addition, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and becomes indeterminate until any signal state continues for the signal determination time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout control device 200 immediately outputs the winning ball command even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. And the payout ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step X109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, the starting opening 1 (first starting winning opening 36), a prize monitoring table is prepared (step X485), and hard random number acquisition processing is performed (step X486). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information on the starting opening winning combination set when the big hit random number is acquired based on the winning on the first starting winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition processing (step X487).

  If the start-up winning combination information is not set based on the winning on the first start-up winning opening 36 (step X487; N), the process moves to step X494. In this case, no starting opening winning combination information is set. On the other hand, if the start-up winning combination information is set based on the winning on the first start winning opening 36 (step X487; Y), it is determined whether high probability is in progress (step X488). And when it is in high probability (step X488; Y), it transfers to step X490. Further, if it is not in the high probability (step X 488; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is medium (in the special game state based on the jackpot) (step X 489).

  Then, if it is not during the big hit (step X 489; N), it proceeds to step X 490. If the jackpot is in progress (step X489; Y), the process moves to step X492. At step X490, a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step X490), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X491). Thereafter, a table for setting the information of suspension by the starting opening 1 is prepared (step X492), and the special view starting opening switch common processing is performed (step X493).

  Next, the starting opening 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) the prize monitoring table was prepared (step X494), hard random number acquisition processing was done (step X495), big hit random number was acquired on the basis of winning a prize to normal fluctuation winning device 37 It is determined whether there is information on the starting opening winning combination set in the case (step X 496).

  If the start-up winning combination information is not set based on the winning of the normal change winning device 37 (step X 496; N), it proceeds to step X 501. In this case, no starting opening winning combination information is set. On the other hand, when the start-up winning combination information is set based on the winning of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (step X 496; Y), the normal electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is in operation, ie, It is determined whether or not the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state where winning of the gaming ball is possible (step X497). If the ordinary electric role is in operation (step X497; Y), Transfer to step X499. On the other hand, if the ordinary motor-operated part is not in operation (step X 497; N), it is determined whether or not the general electric power generation is in progress (step X 498).

  In step X 498, when the number of incorrect winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the determined number of fraud occurrences (for example, 5), it is determined that fraud is occurring. In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gaming ball can not be won in the closed state, and the gaming ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the gaming ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a gaming ball winning in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent winnings. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

  If it is determined in step X 498 that a common electric power fraud is occurring (step X 498; Y), the process proceeds to step X 501. In addition, when it is determined that the common electric power fraud is not occurring (step X 498; N), prepare a table for setting the information of suspension by the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step X 499), and start special drawing After the mouth switch common process (step X500) is performed, the process proceeds to step X501.

  Next, the starting opening 3 (second starting winning opening 97) is prepared for the prize monitoring table (step X501), and hard random number acquisition processing is performed (step X502). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information on the starting opening winning combination set when the big hit random number is acquired based on the winning on the second starting winning opening 97 in the hard random number acquisition processing (step X503).

  If the information on the start opening winning combination is not set based on the winning on the second start winning opening 97 (step X503; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is ended. In this case, no starting opening winning combination information is set. On the other hand, if the start-up winning combination information is set based on the winning on the second start-up winning opening 97 (step X503; Y), it is determined whether high probability is in progress (step X504). And when it is in high probability (step X504; Y), it transfers to step X508. Further, if it is not in the high probability (step X504; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is medium (in the special gaming state based on the jackpot) (step X505).

  If the jackpot is not in progress (step X505; N), the process moves to step X506. If the jackpot is in progress (step X505; Y), the process proceeds to step X508. In step X506, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X506), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X507). Thereafter, a table for setting information on suspension by the starting opening 3 is prepared (step X508), the special view starting opening switch common processing is performed (step X509), and the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended.

  In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command transmitted in steps X490 and X506, the right-handed instruction notification is issued to instruct the player to perform a right-handed operation by display, voice, etc. . If you are in the high probability state, it will be time saving state, so it is better for the player to hit the right at which the normal fluctuation winning device 37 can win, and the first special fluctuation winning device 38 or the second special also during the special gaming state It is advantageous for the player to hit the right at which the variable winning device 39 can win. Therefore, when the winning is detected in the high probability state by the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 which are not to be won unless the player is left-handed, the right hitting instruction notification is performed. In the special game state based on the small hit, since the possibility of winning is low, the right hit notification may not be performed. Further, in the case of the special gaming state based on the 2R probability variation big hit, since the possibility of winning is low, the right hitting notification may not be performed. Further, when the ending in the special game state is being performed, the right-handed notification may not be performed.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
FIG. 32 shows the hard random number acquisition process (steps X486, X495, X502) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. In this hard random number acquisition process, first, start-up opening winning no information is set (step X511), and it is determined whether there is an input to a target switch (step X512).

  If there is no input to the target switch (step X512; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended. If the target switch has an input (step X512; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step X513), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; N), the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. If the target random number latch register has latch data (step X514; Y), the extracted big hit random number is loaded and prepared in the target hard random number latch register (step X515). Then, the start hole winning combination information is set (step X516), and the hard random number acquisition process is ended.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting port switch common processing (steps X493, X500, and X509) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. The special view starting port switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the special view starting port switch common processing, first, among the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a, it relates to the number of winnings on the starting port switch to be monitored. Does the start opening signal output count, which is the number of outputs of information to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, be loaded (step X521), and the loaded value be updated by +1 (step X522), the output count overflows? Is determined (step X523).

  If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start opening signal output number area (step X524), and the process proceeds to step X525. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by +1 updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows and saving is not performed.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of to-be-updated special view reservations (starting memories) corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, and starting opening 3 switch 97a is less than the upper limit. To do (step X525). If the number of to-be-updated holdings to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special-figure starting opening switch common processing ends. Also, when the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations is less than the upper limit (step X525; Y), the number of to-be-updated special drawings (number of special views 1 or number of special 2 reservations) is updated by +1 Step X526), prepare the decoration special drawing reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special drawing reservation number (step X527), perform the rendering command setting process (step X528), and start the starting opening winning flag for the object Is saved (step X529).

  Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special drawing reservations is calculated (step X530), and the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process of steps X486, X495, X502 is RWM. Save in the big hit random number storage area (step X531). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting opening switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (step X533).

  Next, the fluctuation pattern random number (in the case of the present embodiment, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) is saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of RWM (step X534). Then, the small hitting symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X535), and saved in the small hitting symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X536). Thereafter, the special view reserve information determination process (step X537) which is the pre-reading process is performed, and the special view start port switch common process is ended.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of gaming balls into the start winning area of the first start winning opening 36, the second start winning opening 97, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37. A start storage means is provided which stores a predetermined number at the upper limit as a start storage which becomes the right of execution of the variable display game. In addition, the starting memory means (game control device 100), various random number values which are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the 1st starting winning a prize mouth 36 which is the starting mouth of the special figure 1 Various starting random numbers that are stored as starting memory and extracted based on winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 which is the starting opening of the special figure 2, the second starting with a predetermined number as the upper limit Store as a memory.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
FIG. 34 shows the special view reservation information determination process (step X537) in the above-mentioned special view starting opening switch common process. The special view reserve information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the special view start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the special view start storage. In the special view reservation information determination process, first, a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is determined by whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value (step X543). Then, if the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), set a big hit symbol random number check table (step X545), and acquire stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number (step X546), The prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), small hit determination processing is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is a small hit depending on whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value (step X547) ). Then, if the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), stop symbol information of the small hit is set (step X549), and a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the determination result is not a small hit (step X548; N), stop symbol information of the removal is set (step X550), and a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  After preparing the prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551), rendering command setting processing is performed (step X552). Next, a special figure information setting process (step X553) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and a special figure variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. Perform (step X554).

  Then, a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern of the special view fluctuation display game is prepared (step X555), and rendering command setting processing is performed. (Step X556), the special map hold information determination process ends. The special figure information setting process in step X553 and the special figure fluctuation pattern setting process in step X554 are the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the special figure 1 ordinary process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the special figure 2 ordinary process. The process is the same as the process executed at the start of the variable display game.

  With the above processing, the prefetching variation pattern command including the result of the special view variation display game based on the special view start memory and the information of the variation pattern in the special view variation display game based on the special view start storage Are prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetching result) of the result related information (whether or not the big hit or the small hit or the variation pattern type) corresponding to the special view start memory, the special view change display game based on the corresponding special view start memory It is possible to notify the effect control device 300 before the start timing, in particular, by changing the decoration special view start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc. before the start timing of the special view variation display game. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of relevant information.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning memory storage means (game control device 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained (Determine whether or not etc.) Make pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
FIG. 35 shows the special view 1 game process (step X110) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 1 game process, the control of the entire process related to the special figure 1 variable display game and the setting of the display of the special figure 1 are performed. In this special figure 1 game process, first, during the special game state which is executed under the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the big hit or the small hit. It is determined whether or not (step Y101).

  If the special figure 2 is not big hit / small hit (step Y101; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y103) ). Moreover, when it is during the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 (step Y101; Y), it transfers to step Y103.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the upper large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the lower special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39 Perform processing to monitor detection. In special figure 1 game processing, special winning opening switch monitor processing is performed for the special gaming state executed based on the result of special figure 1 fluctuation display game becoming big hit or small hit, special figure 2 fluctuation display The special game state to be executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit is performed a special winning opening switch monitoring process in the special figure 2 game process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special view 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). If the value of the special processing 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the processing proceeds to step Y119 and the subsequent processing is performed. In addition, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y105). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special view 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step Y106), and the subroutine call by the special view 1 game process number is made (step Y107).

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, the setting of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, the setting of the effect, the special Special processing 1 usual processing (step Y108) which sets the information which is necessary in order to do processing in Figure 1 during fluctuation is done. At step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “1”, the special figure 1 setting of the stop display time, the special figure 1 for performing the setting of the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 1 etc. 1) Perform a process during fluctuation (step Y109).

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "2" at step Y107, and if the game result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, the setting of fanfare command according to the type of big hit, each big hit type The special figure 1 display process (step Y110) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the special winning opening pattern, set the information necessary to perform the fan fare / interval process, and the like.

  If the special processing 1 game processing number is "3" at step Y107, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the opening number, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. Perform fanfare / during interval processing (step Y111). If the special figure 1 game processing number is "4" in step Y107, while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, if it is the final round, the processing for setting the ending command, or the special winning opening A special winning opening open process (step Y112) is performed to set information required to perform the remaining ball process.

  At step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, Special figure 1 A big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y113) is performed to set information required to perform the big hit end process. At step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y114) to perform setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 1 routine process (step Y108), etc. I do.

  In step Y107, when the special processing 1 game processing number is “7”, to set the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, to set the fanfare command, to perform the small hit middle processing The small hit fanfare middle processing (step Y115) is performed to set the information necessary for the above. If the special processing 1 game processing number is "8" in step Y107, the small hitting middle processing (step Y116) is performed to set the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hitting residual ball processing. Do.

  At step Y107, when the special processing 1 game processing number is "9", the processing to set the time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hit middle processing, the small hit end A small hit remaining ball process (step Y117) is performed to set information required to perform the process. At step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y118) is performed to set information etc. necessary for performing special figure 1 ordinary processing.

  After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and symbol fluctuation control processing (step Y120) according to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. FIG. 1 The game process ends. The special figure 1 game process is a process of performing a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special figure 2 game processing]
FIG. 36 shows the special view 2 game process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 2 game process, the control of the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game and the setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2.

  In this special figure 2 game process, first, during the special game state which is executed under the big hit / small hit of the special figure 1, that is, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game becomes the big hit or the small hit. It is determined whether it is (step Y131). Then, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 1 is not being performed (step Y131; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated to -1 if it is not 0 Step Y133). Moreover, when it is during the big hit / small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y131; Y), it transfers to step Y133.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the upper large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the lower special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39 Perform processing to monitor detection. In special figure 2 game processing, it is made to do big winning a prize mouth switch supervisory processing concerning the special game state which is executed when the result of special figure 2 variable indication game becomes big hit or small hit, special figure 1 variable indication In the special game state to be executed based on the game result being a big hit or a small hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 1 game process described above.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special view 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). If the value of the special processing 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y152 to perform the subsequent processing. In addition, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y 134; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number The special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y136). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the table (step Y137), and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game process number is made (step Y138).

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “0” in step Y 138, the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game is monitored, and the setting and effect setting of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game, Special figure 2 usual processing (step Y139) which does the setting etc of the information which is necessary in order to do processing in Figure 2 fluctuation is done. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “1” in step Y 138, the special figure 2 is used to set the stop display time and to set the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2) Perform a process during fluctuation (step Y140).

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is "2" at step Y138, and if the game result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, the setting of fanfare command according to the type of big hit, each big hit type The special figure 2 display process (step Y141) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the special winning opening pattern, set the information necessary to perform the fan fare / interval process, and the like.

  If the special processing 2 game processing number is "3" at step Y138, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the number of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. Perform fanfare / during interval processing (step Y142). At step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing for setting the ending command in the final round, or the special winning opening A special winning opening open process (step Y143) is performed to set information required to perform the remaining ball process.

  At step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the special figure 2 A big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y144) is performed to set information required to perform the big hit end process. If the special figure 2 game processing number is "6" in step Y138, the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y145) is performed to set information etc. necessary to perform the special figure 2 routine process (step Y139). I do.

  When special figure 2 game processing number is “7” in step Y138, setting of opening time and opening pattern of big winning opening when small hit occurs, setting of fanfare command, and processing during small hit The small hit fanfare middle process (step Y146) is performed to set the necessary information. If the special processing 2 game processing number is "8" in step Y138, the small hitting middle processing (step Y147) is performed to set the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hitting residual ball processing. Do.

  At step Y138, when the special processing 2 game processing number is "9", the processing to set the time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hit middle processing, the small hit end A small hit remaining ball process (step Y148) is performed to set information required to perform the process. At step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) is performed to set information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing.

  Thereafter, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y152), and symbol fluctuation control processing (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. The game process is ended. This special view 2 game process is a process of performing a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game (special view 2 variable display game). The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process The corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 37 shows the special winning opening switch monitoring process (steps Y102 and Y132) in the special view 1 game process and the special view 2 game process described above. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the upper large winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) is open (step Y161). Then, if the upper prize winning opening is open (step Y161; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. If the upper large winning opening is not open (step Y161; N), it is determined whether the remaining ball processing of the upper large winning opening is in progress (step Y162). The residual ball processing in this determination includes both the big winning opening residual ball processing based on the big hit and the small hit residual ball processing based on the small hit.

  When the remaining ball processing of the upper large winning a prize mouth is in progress (step Y162; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. In addition, when remaining ball processing of upper large winning a prize mouth is not under (step Y162; N), it judges whether or not lower large winning a prize mouth (the 2nd special fluctuation winning a prize device 39) is open (step Y163). Then, if the lower large winning opening is not open (step Y163; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the lower large winning opening is open (step Y163; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower large winning opening switch (step Y164).

  Note that opening in steps Y161 and Y163 means opening in the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the first special result (big hit), and a special gaming state based on the second special result (small hit) Including both being open in the second special game state. Further, the determination in steps Y161 to Y163 may be made with reference to the special view 1 or special view 2 game processing number, or flags may be set to indicate whether they are in the respective states, It may be determined based on this flag.

  When there is no input on the lower large winning opening switch (step Y 164; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when there is an input on the lower large winning opening switch (step Y 164; Y), 1 is set to the winning counter for counting the number of winning to the special winning opening added in the current special winning opening switch monitoring process (Step Y165), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

  On the other hand, if the upper large winning opening is open (step Y161; Y) or if the remaining large ball opening is being processed (step Y162; Y), the winning counter is set to 0 in step Y166. Set (step Y166). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is an input on the upper large winning opening switch 1 (one upper large winning opening switch 38a) (step Y167), and if there is no input (step Y167; N), the process proceeds to step Y171.

  If the upper prize winning opening switch 1 has an input (step Y167; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step Y168), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y169). In the case of the first special variation winning device 38, a special winning opening count command is transmitted to produce effects by winning. Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y170), and it is determined whether there is an input on the upper large winning opening switch 2 (the other upper large winning opening switch 38a) (step Y171).

  Then, if there is no input on the upper large winning opening switch 2 (step Y171; N), it proceeds to step Y175. If the upper prize winning opening switch 2 has an input (step Y171; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step Y172), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y173). Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y174), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

  Thereafter, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step Y175; Y), when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step Y176; Y) or when the small hitting remaining ball processing is in progress (step Y177; Y) If it is any of the above, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step Y 175; N), the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step Y 176; N), and the small hitting remaining ball processing is not in progress (step Y 177; N) The value of the counter is added to the special winning opening count number (step Y178), and it is determined whether the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (step Y179).

  When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (here, 9) (step Y179; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the special winning opening count is equal to or higher than the upper limit (step Y179; Y), the special winning opening count is limited to the upper limit (step Y180), and the target figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (Step Y181). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot is open during the big hit, that is, whether it is the opening in the first special game state which is the special gaming state based on the big hit (step Y182).

  If the jackpot is not open (step Y 182; N), that is, if the jackpot is open, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. When the jackpot is being opened (step Y182; Y), the value of the big hit opening operation end is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (step Y183), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

  In addition, when there is an input on the lower large winning opening switch (step Y 164; Y), a large winning opening count command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 as well. In addition, when there is a remaining ball processing for the lower winning prize opening, a special winning opening count command is sent to the effect control device 300 even when the lower winning prize opening switch is input during the remaining ball processing. You may

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure 1 routine process (step Y108) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 can start changing (step Y201). The state in which the special view 1 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not between the stop of fluctuation of the special view 2 fluctuation display game which is a big hit or a small hit and the end of the special game state. It should be noted that although the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game is in a state where fluctuation can not be started, in that case, special figure 1 normal processing is not being executed. , Here, it is not necessary to judge about this.

  If the special figure 1 can not start changing (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 routine process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 routine process is ended. If the special figure 1 can start changing (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handling instruction notification has been made, that is, whether the left-handling instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). If the left hit instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process moves to step Y206. If the left hit instruction notification has not been made (step Y202; N), a left hit instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y204). After that, the left hitting indication notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether the number of special drawing 1 reservations is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when the special view variation display game last performed in the specific gaming state, which is the high probability state, is ended, and thereby the normal gaming state, which is the low probability state When shifting to the left, a left hitting instruction notification is performed.

  And when the number of special drawing 1 reservations is 0 (Step Y206; Y), it shifts to Step Y217. If the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y206; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y208). Thereafter, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is performed to set information about the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (step Y 209), and a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y 210) , Effect command setting processing (step Y211). In addition, at the time of performing processing (step Y210) for preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command, subtraction of the special figure 1 reservation number based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game is not performed, and the current special figure 1 reservation is held. A number-of-holds command corresponding to the special view 1 number of holds minus 1 is prepared.

  Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y212). Here, the special view status indicates the state of the special view variation display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, and the special figure status 1 indicates that only the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, The special view status 2 indicates that only the special view 2 variation display game is being executed. Further, the special view status 3 indicates that both the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game are being executed, and the special view status 4 is a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. The special view status 5 indicates that the special game state is a second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit. Here, since the special view 1 variation display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special view status.

  Next, it is determined whether it is in the high probability state (step Y213). And when it is in a high probability state (step Y213; Y), it transfers to step Y216. If the high probability state is not in progress (step Y213; N), it is determined whether the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step Y214). During high probability final fluctuation is during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (50 times here) from the end of the first special game state (including the stop time), and the lottery in the high probability state The last special feature variation display game in which the was played is running.

  If it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step Y214; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If the high probability final change is not in progress (step Y214; N), the special view 1 change check flag is set (step Y215). That is, when the special view 1 variation display game is started in the low probability state, the special view 1 variation check flag is set. Thereafter, special processing 1 during fluctuation processing transition setting processing is performed (step Y216), and special processing 1 normal processing is ended.

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 2 routine process (step Y139) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 can start changing (step Y221). The state in which the special view 2 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not between the stop of fluctuation of the special view 1 fluctuation display game which is a big hit or small hit and the end of the special game state. It should be noted that while the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game is in a state where it can not start changing, in that case it is a state where special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. , Here, it is not necessary to judge about this.

  If the special figure 2 can not start changing (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 routine processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 routine processing is ended. If the special figure 2 can start changing (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 reserve number is 0 (step Y222).

  Then, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y224). Thereafter, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is performed to set information about the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y 225), and a decoration special figure reserve number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reserve number is prepared (step Y 226) , Effect command setting processing (step Y227). In addition, at the time of performing processing (step Y226) for preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command, subtraction of the special figure 2 reservation number based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not performed, and the current special figure 2 reservation A number-of-holds command corresponding to the special view 2 number of holds minus 1 is prepared.

  Next, the special figure 2 variation is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y228). Here, since the special view 2 variation display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special view status. Then, it is determined whether or not the high probability state is in progress (step Y229), and if it is in the high probability state (step Y229; Y), the process proceeds to step Y232. If the high probability state is not in progress (step Y 229; N), it is determined whether the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step Y 230). During high probability final fluctuation is during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (50 times here) from the end of the first special game state (including the stop time), and the lottery in the high probability state The last special feature variation display game in which the was played is running.

  If the high probability final change is in progress (step Y230; Y), the process moves to step Y232. If the high probability final change is not in progress (step Y230; N), the special view 2 change check flag is set (step Y231). That is, when the special figure 2 variation display game is started in the low probability state, the special figure 2 variation check flag is set. Thereafter, special processing 2 variation processing transition setting processing is performed (step Y232), and the special processing 2 routine processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reserve number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reserve number is 0 (step Y233). Then, if the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y233; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in the process of change (step Y234). Then, when the special figure 1 is not moving (step Y234; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y235), and when it is not disclosed (step Y235; N), the customer waiting state is Perform processing related to setting. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y233; N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step Y234; Y) or when the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y235; Y), , And step Y239.

  In the processing for setting the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step Y236), and the customer waiting demonstration command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y237). A command setting process is performed (step Y238), and the process shifts to step Y239. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it becomes possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

  In addition, when the effect control device 300 is restarted due to any cause, the effect control device 300 without the backup function loses the information of the gaming state, so that it is not possible to perform appropriate effects, but the customer By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform effects according to the gaming state from the reception of this command, and it is possible that the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state is transmitted. It is possible to return to the effect according to the game state earlier than waiting.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be simultaneously executed, and it is also conceivable that the probability state changes due to the processing for the special figure 1 variation display game. Therefore, the variation start probability information command is transmitted each time the special view variation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). Thus, the effect control device 300 can perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

  In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command at each start of the special view fluctuation display game, even when the effect control device 300 is restarted, from the reception of this command, an effect according to the gaming state is performed. It is possible to return to the effect according to the gaming state more quickly than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state to be transmitted. The customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for enabling the effect to be returned to the effect according to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
FIG. 40 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the special figure 1 normal process described above. This special view 1 change start process is a process performed at the start of the special view 1 change display game. First, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and outlier information as result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game The big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y 242) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y 243) according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set Information setting processing (step Y 244) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding setting of fluctuation patterns of the special drawing 1 fluctuation display game is set ( Step Y245).

  Thereafter, special figure fluctuation pattern setting processing (step Y246) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting processing for setting information of fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (Step Y247) is performed. By these processes, the result and fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed from now on are determined. Thereafter, high probability change number of times update processing is performed to manage the period in which the high probability state is set (step Y248), and the special view 1 change start processing is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 41 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y 225) in the special figure 2 normal process described above. The special view 2 change start process is a process performed at the start of the special view 2 change display game. First, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and outlier information as result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game The big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y 262) is performed to set the big hit information or the small hit information.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step Y 264) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set ( Step Y265).

  Thereafter, special figure fluctuation pattern setting processing (step Y266) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting processing for setting information of fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (Step Y267) is performed. By these processes, the result and fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be executed from now on are determined. Thereafter, high probability change number of times update processing is performed to manage the period in which the high probability state is set (step Y268), and the special view 2 change start processing is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
FIG. 42 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y 242) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y 271), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y 272). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) of RWM and prepared (step Y 273), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 1).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game being executed is a big hit (step Y 275), and if it is a big hit (step Y 275; Y), it proceeds to step Y 279 Do. That is, both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed simultaneously are not considered to be a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y 275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y 276) is performed to determine whether or not the obtained big hit random number matches the big hit determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is a big hit (step Y277; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the outlier information is saved in step Y272 (step Y278) ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), whether the obtained big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value or not The small hit determination process (step Y279) is performed.

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area in which the outlier information is saved in step Y271. (Step Y281), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not a small hit (step Y280; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. In this case, outlier information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
FIG. 43 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y 262) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y 291), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y 292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) of RWM (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area is cleared to 0. It should be noted that the one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 2).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game being executed is a big hit (step Y 295), and if it is a big hit (step Y 295; Y), it proceeds to step Y 299 Do. That is, both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed simultaneously are not considered to be a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y 295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y 296) is performed to determine whether or not the obtained big hit random number matches the big hit determination value.

  Then, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y 296) is a big hit (step Y 297; Y), the big hit information is saved by overwriting the big hit information in the big hit flag 2 area saved with the out information at step Y 292 (step Y 298) ), And the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y 296) is not a big hit (step Y 297; N), whether or not the obtained big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether the small hit judgment value matches. Small hit determination processing (step Y 299) to determine

  Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y 299) is a small hit (step Y 300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area where the outlier information is saved in step Y 291 and saved. (Step Y301), the big hit flag 2 setting processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. In this case, outlier information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 44 shows the big hit determination process (steps Y276 and Y296) in the above-described big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this big hit determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, a judgment result is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. In addition, with the omission as a judgment result, it shows that it fell out to the lottery of the big hit. If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether the state is a high probability state (step Y313).

  Then, in the case of the high probability state (step Y313; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set (step Y314), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step Y316). ). If the state is not the high probability state (step Y313; N), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (step Y315), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316) .

  If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as a judgment result (step Y317), and the jackpot judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step Y318), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 45 shows small hit determination processing (steps Y279 and Y299) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting processing and big hit flag 2 setting processing. In this small hitting determination process, it is first determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hitting lower limit judgment value (step Y321). Note that being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and is not higher than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value do not overlap.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a gap is set as the judgment result (step Y326) and the small hit judgment processing is ended. In addition, with the result as a judgment result, it shows that it fell out to the lottery of a small hit. Also, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y 321; N), it is judged whether the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed, that is, the judgment about the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (Step Y322).

  Then, when the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed (step Y322; Y), the small hitting upper limit judgment value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), the value of the target big hit random number is the small hitting upper limit judgment value It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). Also, when the information setting of the special figure 1 is not being performed (step Y322; N), that is, when it is the determination about the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the small hitting upper limit judgment value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324) It is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the small hitting upper limit judgment value (step Y 325).

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y326), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y 325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step Y 327) and the small hit judgment processing is ended. Do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 46 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of reservations 1) ) From the jackpot symbol random number (step Y332). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y334). The jackpot type is selected by this process. The special symbol 1 variation display game is saved not in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area but in the special symbol 1 stop symbol evacuation area when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variation display game There is a possibility that it will be forced to be changed to the result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 1 display 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (step Y 337), and the special winning opening open information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired The special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area is saved (step Y 338). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, a decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339). If it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step Y340). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stopped symbol save area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this process. Thereafter, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special view 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and the decorative special view 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y 339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y 344), and the off stop symbol pattern is special figure 1 stop The symbol pattern area is saved (step Y345), and the decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure 1 command is saved in the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y347), and effect command setting processing (step Y348) is performed. This decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 349), and the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y 350). One small hit symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y 351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 47 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is performed for the special figure 2 as a target. In this special view 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y 361), and if it is a big hit (step Y 361; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of reservations 1) ) From the jackpot symbol random number (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step Y363), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired and it saves in the special figure 2 stop design evacuation territory (step Y364). The jackpot type is selected by this process. It should be noted that the special symbol 2 variation display game is saved not in the special symbol 2 stop symbol region but in the special symbol 2 stop symbol withdrawal region when the special result is derived in the special symbol 1 variation display game There is a possibility that it will be forced to be changed to the result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 2 display 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (step Y367), and the special winning opening open information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired It saves in the special figure 2 large winning a prize opening opening information field (step Y368). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y 361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y 369). If it is a small hit (step Y 369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step Y370). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y372). The small hit type is selected by this process. Thereafter, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special view 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373), and the decorative special view 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y 369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y 374), and the off stop symbol pattern is special figure 2 stop The symbol pattern area is saved (step Y 375), and the decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y 376). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure 2 command is saved in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y377), and effect command setting processing (step Y378) is performed. This decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y380). 2 Small hit symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y 381), and special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing is ended.

[Special map information setting process]
FIG. 48 shows the special figure information setting process (steps Y244 and Y264) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. This special view information setting process is a process common to the special view 1 and the special view 2, and when the special view 1 change start process is performed, the special view 1 is set as the target special view, and the special view 2 change start process is performed. When it is detected, the processing is performed with the special drawing 2 as the target special drawing.

  In the special view information setting process, first, it is determined whether high probability is in progress (step Y401). If it is not in the high probability (step Y401; N), set the low probability time variation pattern selection information table (step Y402), get the first half offset data, the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the target special figure Then (step Y403), it is determined whether the target special figure is a big hit, that is, the stop symbol pattern of the target special figure is a big hit stop symbol pattern (step Y404).

  If the special view of the object is a big hit (step Y404; Y), the process moves to step Y412. In addition, when the special figure of the object is not a big hit (step Y404; N), it is determined whether the special figure of the object is a small hit, that is, the stop symbol pattern of the special figure of the object is a stop symbol pattern of a small hit (step Y 405). Then, if the target special drawing is not a small hit (step Y405; N), that is, if it is a release, the number of special drawing reservations is added to the first half offset data to convert the value (step Y407), and the process proceeds to step Y412. Do. In addition, when the special figure of the object is the small hit (step Y405; Y), it moves to step Y412.

  On the other hand, when it is in the high probability (step Y401; Y), the high probability time fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y408), the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the target special figure Are obtained (step Y409), and the process moves to step Y412.

  Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y 412), and the second half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y 413) End the process.

  That is, in the special game variation display game in the normal gaming state, the variation pattern is determined in consideration of the number of special figures reserved only in the first half variation pattern in the case of a loss, and the number of special figures reserved in the case of big hit or small hit Let the fluctuation pattern be determined without consideration. Further, in the special view variation display game in the specific gaming state, the variation pattern is determined without considering the special view reserve number.

[Special figure fluctuation pattern setting processing]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure fluctuation pattern setting process (steps Y246 and Y266) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation aspect from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation which is the fluctuation aspect from the reaching state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game The second half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

  In this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection address table is set (step Y451), and the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452) Then, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storing area (for holding number 1) of the target special figure (step Y453).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is dislocated, that is, the stop symbol pattern is dislocated stop symbol pattern (step Y454), and when the target special figure is dislocated (step Y454; Y), 2-byte distribution processing Go (step Y455), and shift to step Y457. If the target special figure is not out of step (step Y454; N), distribution processing is performed (step Y456), and the process moves to step Y457. When the result is a big hit or a small hit, the distribution value is 1 byte, but when the result is a release, the distribution value is 2 bytes in order to enable various effects.

  Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y 457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for number of reservations 1) of the target special figure. Prepare (step Y 458). Then, distribution processing (step Y459) is performed, and the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half fluctuation number area (step Y460). By this process, the second half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for number of reservations 1) of the target figure. Prepare (step Y464).

  Thereafter, distribution processing (step Y465) is performed, the first-half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first-half fluctuation number area (step Y467), and the special figure fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the entire period of the special figure fluctuation display game to be started from now is set.

[2-byte distribution process]
FIG. 50 shows 2-byte distribution processing (step Y455) in the above-mentioned special drawing fluctuation pattern setting processing. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the head data of the prepared second half change group table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (step Y501). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern group, but defines the second half fluctuation pattern group in which only the second half fluctuation pattern is "no reach". In the variation group table, since there is no need for sorting, a sorting value “0”, that is, a code without sorting is specified at the top.

  Then, if the first data of the second half fluctuation group table is a code without distribution (step Y502; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process is ended. Do. On the other hand, if the first data of the latter half fluctuation group table is not a code without distribution (step Y502; N), one distribution value defined first in the latter half fluctuation group table is acquired (step Y503).

  Next, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y 373 from the loaded random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step Y 504), and the calculated new random number value Is smaller than "0" (step Y505). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step Y505; N), after updating to the address of the next distributed value (step Y506), the process proceeds to step Y503, and the subsequent processes are performed. Do. That is, after the distribution value defined next in the variation group selection table is obtained in step Y503, the distribution value is subtracted by using the determined random number value as a new random number value in step Y505, and further new disturbance A numerical value is calculated (step Y504). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number is smaller than "0" (step Y505).

  The above process is executed until it is determined in step Y505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505; Y). Thereby, any one second half fluctuation selection table is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the second half fluctuation group table. When it is determined in step Y505 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step Y505; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step Y507), and 2-byte distribution processing is performed. Finish.

[Distribution process]
FIG. 51 shows the sorting process (steps Y456, Y459, Y465) in the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation pattern setting process and the special figure fluctuation pattern setting process. In the distribution process, the second half variation pattern of the special view variation display game is selected from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 or the first half variation selection table ( It is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether the head data of the prepared second half change selection table (selection table) or the first half change selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, "0"). (Step Y511). Here, the second-half fluctuation selection table and the first-half fluctuation selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second-half fluctuation pattern or first-half fluctuation pattern as in the second-half fluctuation group table. In the case of a selection table without any, the distribution value "0", that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step Y512; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step Y517), End the process. On the other hand, when the first data of the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without distribution (step Y512; N), one distribution value defined first in the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table To obtain (step Y513).

  Next, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y513 from the loaded random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 2 or fluctuation pattern random number 3) (step Y514), and then the calculation is performed. It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step Y515; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y516), the process proceeds to step Y513, and the subsequent steps Do the processing.

  That is, after the distribution value defined next in the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table is obtained in step Y513, the divided random value is determined as a new random number value and the distribution value is subtracted in step Y515. , And further calculate new random numbers (step Y514). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than "0" (step Y515).

  The above process is executed until it is determined in step Y515 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step Y515; Y). Thus, any one of the second-half fluctuation number and the first-half fluctuation number is selected from at least one second-half fluctuation pattern or the first-half fluctuation pattern defined in the second-half fluctuation selection table or the first-half fluctuation selection table. Then, if it is determined in step Y515 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step Y517), and the distribution processing is ended. Do.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 52 shows fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y247 and Y267) in the special drawing 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing described above. In this variation start information setting process, first, it is determined whether the information setting of the special view 1 is being performed (step Y551), and when the information setting of the special view 1 is being performed (step Y551; Y), The random number storage area (for holding number 1) of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y552). In addition, when the information setting in the special figure 1 is not being performed (step Y551; N), that is, when the information setting in the special figure 2 is being performed, the random number storage area of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the special figure 2 is cleared (step Y553).

  Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y554), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y555). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y556), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y557). Then, the former half fluctuation time value and the latter half fluctuation time value are added (step Y558), and the addition value is saved in the target figure game processing timer area (step Y559).

  Thereafter, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y564), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step Y565), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y566) ). Next, the special figure reservation number of the target is updated by -1 (step Y568), the contents of the random number storage area of the target special figure are shifted (step Y569), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step Y570) , End the variation start information setting process.

  Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is, the game control apparatus 100 can determine the result of the variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game) and the fluctuation mode information based on the start memory stored in the start memory means. Form a means of decision making. Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game. The detailed effect contents in the special figure variation display game are set. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game For example, a variation command including information on a pattern may be mentioned. In addition, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command.

  That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a first variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game processing. Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). Moreover, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

  In addition, the game control apparatus 100 can transmit the result of the first variation display game and the variation mode information and the result of the second variation display game and the variation mode information as control information to the effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) Provide a means of transmission. In addition, for each of the first variable display game and the second variable display game, the game control device 100 starts measuring the fluctuation time in response to the start of the fluctuation display game, and the measurement time exceeds the fluctuation time. It serves as a measuring means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

[High probability change frequency update processing]
FIG. 53 shows the high probability change number updating process (steps Y248 and Y268) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the high probability change number update process, first, it is determined whether the high probability is in progress (step Y581). When the high probability change is not in progress (step Y581; N), the high probability change number update process is ended. Also, if the high probability is in progress (step Y581; Y), the high probability fluctuation number of managing the number of times of execution of the special figure fluctuation display game to be in the high probability state is updated by -1 (step Y582), and the high probability fluctuation number Is judged to be 0 (step Y 583).

  If the high probability fluctuation number is not 0 (step Y 583; N), that is, if the high probability state continues, the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended. When the high probability fluctuation number is 0 (step Y 583; Y), that is, when the high probability state is ended, the signal regarding the end of the high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 585) . Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF.

  Further, the low probability state and the number without time saving are saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y586), and the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y587). Then, the high probability final fluctuation flag corresponding to the symbol which starts fluctuation is set (step Y 588), the common drawing low probability flag is saved in the common drawing game mode flag area (step Y 589), and the high probability fluctuation number updating process finish. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a specific gaming state generation means for generating a specific gaming state during a period until the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the special gaming state. In addition, although it was set as the high probability state and time saving state as a specific gaming state, it is good also as a state which generates only one side.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the high probability state is set until the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the special gaming state, but the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display Since the game can be executed simultaneously, the high probability change number update process of managing the number of high probability states is performed at the start of the special figure change display game. As in the prior art, in the case of a gaming machine in which one special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed while the other special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the probability state is There is no problem if you change to a low probability state. However, when it is possible to execute the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game simultaneously as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability state is low when the special view variation display game is finished a predetermined number of times. If changing to the state, the determination is also made in the high probability state until the other special figure fluctuation display game started during the execution of the one special figure fluctuation display game, and the high probability over a predetermined number of times It becomes possible to execute the game in the state. Therefore, when it is possible to simultaneously execute the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, one special figure fluctuation display game, which is a predetermined number of times, is in high probability state After the determination, it is necessary to set the low probability state before the start of the other special figure variation display game, and here, immediately after the processing at the start of the one special figure variation display game which is the predetermined number of times is completed. It is possible to change to the low probability state.

  As described above, since the high probability change number of times update process is performed at the start of the special figure change display game, the last special figure change display game for which the lottery in the high probability state is performed is the change of the special figure change display game. The display is already in a low probability state. Therefore, if other processes perform processing with reference to the actual probability state during the variable display of the special figure fluctuation display game, processing may be performed as a low probability state, which may cause inconvenience. is there. Therefore, the high probability final change flag is set to enable the special view change display game to be treated as a game being executed as a high probability state. Also, the high probability final change flag is information that can be used to determine whether the last special view change display game for which the lottery in the high probability state is performed is the special view 1 change display game or the special view 2 change display game. Contains.

[Special figure 1 during process transition setting process]
FIG. 54 shows the process shift setting process (step Y216) in the special figure 1 during special figure 1 processing. In this special figure 1 during process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y603), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and select the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 1 indicator 51 blinker timer) in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (step Y605). For example, 100 ms is set (step Y606). Further, an initial value is set in the special figure 1 in-change symbol number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 in-change processing transition setting process is ended.

  During the special figure 1 variation, the initial value to be set in the symbol number area is 0, so that the variation indication is started from the state in which all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state in which the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state in which all the segments are turned off.

[Special figure 2 during process transition setting process]
FIG. 55 shows the process shift setting process (step Y230) in the special figure 2 during the special figure 2 normal process. In the special figure 2 in-process change processing setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y611), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y612).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y613), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, save the flag during fluctuation in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y 615), the initial value of the blinking control timer in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) For example, 100 ms is set (step Y616). Further, an initial value is set to the special figure 2 in-change symbol number area (step Y617), and the special figure 2 in-change processing transition setting process is ended.

  During the special figure 2 variation, the initial value to be set in the symbol number area is 0, so that the variation display is started from the state in which all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state in which the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state in which all the segments are turned off.

  When the variable display is started on the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52, it is assumed that all segments are turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode in any of the result modes, or if there is a segment not used in any of the result modes, the variable display is started from the state of lighting at least the segment You may do it. Also, the variable display may be started from the state in which the same one segment is always lighted each time. Moreover, the lighting aspect at the time of starting a fluctuation | variation with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be same or different.

[Process during special figure 1 change]
FIG. 56 shows the special figure 1 during fluctuation process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 fluctuation process, first, the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by +1 (step Y 621), and a command is loaded from the special figure 1 command area and prepared (step Y 622). Perform (step Y623).

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y 624), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y 625). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there is also a case where the game is forcibly stopped earlier than the fluctuation time set at the start of fluctuation, so when stopping fluctuation, a stop command is sent to the effect control device 300 .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the final change of high probability (step Y626). When the special figure 1 variation display game is the final variation with high probability, the high probability final variation flag of special figure 1 is set. Then, if it is not the final change of the high probability (step Y626; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y627), and the process proceeds to step Y629. If the final change is a high probability (step Y 626; Y), the display time for the high probability final change is set (step Y 628), and the process moves to step Y 629. In addition, as a display time (stop time) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game set here, when it is not a high probability final fluctuation, 600 ms in the case of loss, 2000 ms in the big hit, and 600 ms in the small hit The display time of is set. Further, in the case of the high probability final fluctuation, the display time of 2000 ms is set regardless of the result.

  After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is off, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is off (step Y629). If the special figure 1 deviates (step Y629; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. If the special figure 1 does not deviate (step Y629; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game is also being executed (step Y630). Note that whether or not the special view 2 variation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special view status.

  And when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not being executed (step Y630; Y), it moves to step Y640. When the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (step Y630; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 display process is in progress (step Y631). That is, in this case, based on the special figure 1 variable display game becoming a special result, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forced to be stopped at the out result. In addition, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has already ended the fluctuation display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it becomes the target of the forced stop.

  If the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y 631; Y), the process proceeds to step Y 633. If the special figure 2 is not being processed (step Y 631; N), the number of symbol determination times output is updated by 1 (step Y 632), and the special figure 1 display time set above as the special figure 2 display time A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y633). By setting the display time of the special view 1 + 4 ms as the display time of the special view 2, the display times of the special view 1 and the special view 2 simultaneously end. In addition, even when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and the display time is newly started.

  Next, save the display time in the special view 2 game processing timer area (step Y 634), load and prepare a command from the decorative special view 2 command area (step Y 635), and perform effect command setting processing (step Y 636). ). Thereafter, the decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y638), and special figure 2 display process transition setting processing 2 is performed (step Y639).

  Then, load the command from the decoration special figure 1 command area and save it in the hit symbol command area (step Y 640), and whether it is the special figure 1 small hit, that is, the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is the small hit Is determined (step Y641). When it is a special figure 1 small hit (step Y641; Y), it transfers to step Y644. Also, when the special figure 1 small hit (step Y 641; N), ie, when it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y 642) ), Information is loaded from the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y643).

  Thereafter, information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y 644), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y 645). End processing while displaying.

[Special figure 2 during processing]
FIG. 57 shows the special figure 2 during fluctuation process (step Y140) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 fluctuation process, first, the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by +1 (step Y651), and the special figure 2 command is loaded from the command area and prepared (step Y652). Perform (step Y653).

  Next, the decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y655). Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the final change of high probability (step Y656). When the special figure 2 variation display game is the final variation with high probability, the high probability final variation flag of the special figure 2 is set.

  Then, if it is not the final change of the high probability (step Y656; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y657), and the process proceeds to step Y659. If it is the final variation with high probability (step Y 656; Y), the display time at the time of the high probability final variation is set (step Y 658), and the process shifts to step Y 659. In addition, as a display time (stop time) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game set here, when it is not a high probability final fluctuation, 600 ms in the case of loss, 2000 ms in the big hit, and 600 ms in the small hit The display time of is set. Further, in the case of the high probability final fluctuation, the display time of 2000 ms is set regardless of the result.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is off, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a removal (step Y659). When the special figure 2 deviates (step Y659; Y), it transfers to step Y674. If the special figure 2 is not deviated (step Y659; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation display game is also being executed (step Y660). Note that whether or not the special view 1 variation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special view status.

  And, when the special figure 1 fluctuation indicatory game is not under execution (step Y660; Y), it moves to step Y670. In addition, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed (step Y660; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 display is being processed (step Y661). That is, in this case, based on the special figure 2 variable display game becoming a special result, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forced to be stopped at the out result. In addition, even if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game has already ended the fluctuation display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it becomes a target of forced stop.

  If the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y 661; Y), the process proceeds to step Y 664. When the special figure 1 display is not being processed (step Y 661; N), the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by 1 (step Y 662), and the process proceeds to step Y 664.

  Next, save the display time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y664), load and prepare a command from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and perform effect command setting processing (step Y666) ). Thereafter, the decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y668), and special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 is performed (step Y669).

  Then, load the command from the decoration special figure 2 command area and save it in the hit symbol command area (step Y 670), and whether it is the special figure 2 small hit, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is the small hit Is determined (step Y671). When it is the special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; Y), it moves to step Y674. Also, if it is not a special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y672) ), Information is loaded from the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y673).

  Thereafter, information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y 674), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting processing 1 is performed (step Y 675). End processing while displaying.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 58 shows the process shift setting process 1 (step Y645) during the special figure 1 display in the special figure 1 fluctuation process described above. In this special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 1 game process number "2" related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y681), and the special figure 1 game process number area is processed number Save (step Y682).

  Next, the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 1 display 51 is saved in the special view 1 change control flag region (step Y684) Special process 1) during process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 59 shows the process shift setting process 1 (step Y 675) during the special figure 2 display in the special figure 2 fluctuation process described above. In this special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 2 game process number "2" related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y691), and the special figure 2 game process number area is processed number Is saved (step Y692).

  Next, the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special view 2 change display game in the special view 2 display 52, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 2 display 52 is saved in the special view 2 change control flag region (step Y694) Special process 2) during process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 2]
FIG. 60 shows the process shift setting process 2 (step Y 669) during the special figure 1 display in the special figure 2 fluctuation process described above. In this special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 1 game process number "2" related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y 701), and the special figure 1 game process number area is processed number Is saved (step Y702).

  Next, save the signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, The stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y704).

  The process up to this point is the same as in the special process 1 during process transition setting process 1 described above, and thereafter, information is set to be a result of outliers. First, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y706).

  Next, clear the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area (step Y 707), save the shift information in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y 708), save the shift information in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y 709) ). Then, clear the special pattern 1 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y710), save the special stop symbol area in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area (step Y711), and output the test data corresponding to the off stop symbol number to the test signal The data is saved in the data area (step Y712), and the special processing 1 display transition processing setting processing 2 is ended.

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 61 shows the process shift setting process 2 (step Y639) during the special figure 2 display in the special figure 1 fluctuation process described above. In this special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 2 game process number "2" related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and the special figure 2 game process number area is processed number Save (step Y722).

  Next, save the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, The stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop on the display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y 724).

  The process up to this point is the same as the above-mentioned process of setting transition to processing 1 during special image 2 display, and thereafter, information is set to be a result of the removal. First, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y 725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y 726).

  Next, clear the special figure 2 big winning a prize opening open information territory (step Y727), save gap information in the small hitting flag 2 territory (step Y728), save gap information in the big hit flag 2 territory (step Y729) ). Then, clear the special pattern 2 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y 730), save the special symbol 2 stop symbol area and save the off stop symbol number (step Y 731), and output the test data corresponding to the off stop symbol number The data is saved in the data area (step Y732), and the process transition setting process 2 during special image 2 display is ended.

  By the processing of FIG. 56 to FIG. 61 described above, when one of the special figure fluctuation display games becomes a special result, the other special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped at the outfall result. That is, based on the special figure 1 variable display game becoming a special result, a first end control process is performed in which the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped at the out result, and the special figure 2 variable display game is a special result. As a result, the second end control process is performed in which the special view 1 variation display game is forcibly stopped on the basis of the out result.

  In the process of saving symbol data corresponding to the off stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (steps Y732 and Y712), a test signal corresponding to the result of the special view fluctuation display game stopped by the shooting test device is fetched. You can do it by the timing. For example, processing for saving symbol data corresponding to the off stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (steps Y712 and Y732) and processing for saving a signal related to the end of fluctuation in the test signal output data area (steps Y703 and Y723) It is made to be performed at one interrupt timing, but the processing (steps Y712 and Y732) to save the symbol data corresponding to the out-of-stop symbol number in the test signal output data area is performed and the interrupt timing after the data is output Then, processing (steps Y703 and Y723) may be performed to save a signal related to the end of fluctuation in the test signal output data area. That is, for the special view fluctuation display game to be changed to the disconnection result, a test signal to the effect of the deviation result may be output before the output of the test signal related to the end of the fluctuation.

  From the above, the first variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variation display game when the execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is performed. A first variable display game in which execution control is performed when a second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) whose execution control is being performed by the control means (game control apparatus 100) becomes a special result Can be ended as a result other than the special result, and the second variation display game execution control unit is executed by the first variation display game execution control unit when execution control of the second variation display game is performed. If the first variable display game being controlled results in a special result, it is possible to end the second variable display game that is performing the execution control as a result other than the special result. The Rukoto. In this way, when a special result is derived in one of the variable display games, the other variable display game can be forcibly stopped by the result of the unbalance, and even when simultaneous fluctuation is performed, no problem occurs. Can be

[Process while displaying special figure 1]
62 and 63 show the special figure 1 display process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y751), the small hit flag Clear one area (step Y752).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y 753), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y 754). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit information (step Y755), and if it is not a big hit (step Y755; N), the process proceeds to step Y777. Also, if it is a big hit (step Y 755; Y), the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON), the feature continuous operating device operating, regarding the start of the special game 1 variable display game The medium signal is on, and the special symbol 1 signal is on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

  Thereafter, the number-of-rounds upper limit table is set (step Y759), and the number-of-rounds upper limit corresponding to the number-of-rounds upper limit information (16, 8, 4, or 2 in the case of this embodiment) is acquired. Save to the area (step Y760). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

  Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the special drawing 1 stop design pattern is hit and prepared from the design command area (step Y762), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y763). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y765).

  Next, a signal corresponding to the special winning opening information and the probability of becoming a big hit in the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of the present embodiment, in step Y766, as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the state of probability, the big hit 2 signal and the big hit 3 signal are saved. In addition, each ON / OFF is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned ON when the big hit type is a big hit other than 2R probability variation D1, and is turned ON when 2R probability variation D1 in high probability state, 2R probability variation in low probability state When it is D1, it is turned off. Also, the big hit 3 signal is turned ON when the big hit type is a big hit other than 2R probability variation D1, and is turned OFF when 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, 2R probability variation in the low probability state It is turned ON when it is D1.

  Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms or 4 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening information is set (step Y 767), and the set big hit fan fare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y 768) . Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the upper large winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) (step Y769).

  If it is a big hit to open the top large winning opening (step Y 769; Y), clear the top large winning opening fraudulent winning number area (step Y 770), flag over fraudulent monitoring period flag area in the top winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area Are saved (step Y771), and the process proceeds to step Y774. Also, if it is not a big hit to open the top big winning opening (step Y 769; N), that is, if it is a big hit to open the bottom big winning opening (second special variation winning device 39), the bottom big winning opening unfair winning number area Is cleared (step Y772), the flag for the fraud monitoring period outside is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y773), and the process proceeds to step Y774.

  Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y774), and the special processing 1 game processing number area is saved (step Y775). Further, the fanfare / interval process shift setting process (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y 755; N) at step Y 755, ie, if the big hit flag 1 is disengaging information, it is judged whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (small hit information). To do (step Y777). Then, if the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y 777; Y), it is a high probability final fluctuation, that is, whether it is the last special figure fluctuation display game for which the lottery in the high probability state is performed It determines (step Y778).

  If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y778; N), the process moves to step Y783. If the final change is a high probability (step Y 778; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y 779), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y 780). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y 781), and the left hitting instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y 782). By clearing the left-handed command notification flag, a left-handed command notification command is set in the special processing 1 special processing to be performed next time, and a notification to instruct a left-handed command is performed.

  Thereafter, a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y783), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y784). Furthermore, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y 785), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y 786), and a signal relating to a right-handed command is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 790). Here, it is set to turn on the launch position designation signal 1. Then, the game state display number 2 area is saved with the number in the right-handed state (step Y791). As a result, the first gaming state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing a right-handed is displayed.

  After that, it is determined whether it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (the first special variation winning device 38) (step Y792). If it is a small hit that opens the upper winning opening (step Y792; Y), The upper prize winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step Y 793), the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y 794), and the process proceeds to step Y 797. Also, if it is not a small hit to open the upper large winning opening (step Y 792; N), that is, if it is a small hit to open the lower large winning opening (second special variation winning device 39), the lower large winning opening illegal prize A number area is cleared (step Y795), a fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step Y796), and the process proceeds to step Y797. Then, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process (step Y 797) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is ended.

  If it is determined in step Y 777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y 777; N), it is a high probability final change, that is, the last special drawing for which the lottery in the high probability state was performed It is determined whether it is a variable display game (step Y798).

  If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y798; N), the process moves to step Y806. If the final change is a high probability (step Y798; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y799), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y800). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y801), and the left hitting instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y802). A signal regarding the end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y803). Here, it is set to turn off the jackpot 2 signal.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a special hit of the special figure 2 is in progress, that is, a second special gaming state based on the small hit generated in the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y804). When it is in the small hit of the special figure 2 (step Y804; Y), it moves to step Y807. Thus, the state of instructing to hit the right is maintained. If the special figure 2 is not in the small hit (step Y804; N), save the signal concerning the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (step Y805), and in the game state display number 2 area Save the number (step Y806). Thereafter, clear the special figure 1 fluctuation of the special figure status area (information subtraction) (step Y 807), perform special process transition setting process 1 for special figure 1 (step Y 808), and end the special figure 1 display processing. .

[Process during special figure 2 display]
In FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, the special figure 2 display process (step Y141) in the special figure 2 game process described above is shown. In the process of displaying the special view 2, the same process as the process of displaying the special view 1 described above is performed for the special view 2. In the special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), the small hit flag Clear the two areas (step Y812).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y 815), and if it is not a big hit (step Y 815; N), it proceeds to step Y 837. Also, if it is a big hit (step Y 815; Y), the test signal (for example, to turn on the condition device operating signal, the feature continuous operation device operating the special equipment 2 variation display game big hit (special image 2 large hit) start The medium signal is turned on, and the special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

  Thereafter, the number-of-rounds upper limit table is set (step Y 819), and the number-of-rounds upper limit (16, 8, 4, or 2 in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the number-of-rounds upper limit information is acquired to set the number of rounds upper limit Save to the area (step Y820). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

  Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the special drawing 2 stop design pattern is hit and prepared from the design command area (step Y822), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y823). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y825).

  Next, a signal corresponding to the special winning opening information and the probability of becoming a big hit in the special view variable display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of the present embodiment, in step Y826, two jackpots and three jacks are saved as signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned ON when the big hit type is a big hit other than 2R probability variation D1, and is turned ON when 2R probability variation D1 in high probability state, 2R probability variation in low probability state When it is D1, it is turned off. Also, the big hit 3 signal is turned ON when the big hit type is a big hit other than 2R probability variation D1, and is turned OFF when 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, 2R probability variation in the low probability state It is turned ON when it is D1.

  Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms or 4 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is set (step Y 827), and the set big hit fan fare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y 828) . Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the upper large winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) (step Y829).

  If it is a big hit to open the top large winning opening (step Y 829; Y), clear the top large winning opening fraudulent winning number area (step Y 830), flag over fraudulent monitoring period flag area in the top winning prize opening fraud monitoring period flag Are saved (step Y 831), and the process proceeds to step Y 834. Also, if it is not a big hit to open the top big winning opening (step Y 829; N), that is, if it is a big hit to open the bottom big winning opening (second special variation winning device 39), the bottom big winning opening fraud winning number area Is cleared (step Y 832), the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the lower large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y 833), and the process proceeds to step Y 834.

  Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y834), and the special figure 2 game process number area is saved (step Y835). Further, the fanfare / interval process shift setting process (step Y 836) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y 815; N) at step Y 815, that is, if the big hit flag 2 is out information, it is judged whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y837). Then, if the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y 837; Y), it is a high probability final fluctuation, that is, whether it is the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery in the high probability state is performed It determines (step Y838).

  If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y 838; N), the process proceeds to step Y 843. If the final change is a high probability (step Y 838; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y 839), and rendering command setting processing is performed (step Y 840). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y841), and the left hitting instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y842). By clearing the left-handed command notification flag, a left-handed command notification command is set in the special processing 1 special processing to be performed next time, and a notification to instruct a left-handed command is performed.

  Thereafter, a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y843), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y844). Furthermore, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y846), and a signal related to a right-handed command is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, it is set to turn on the launch position designation signal 1. Then, the game state display number 2 area is saved with the number in the right-handed state (step Y 851). As a result, the first gaming state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing a right-handed is displayed.

  After that, it is determined whether it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (the first special variation winning device 38) (step Y852). If it is a small hit that opens the upper winning opening (step Y852; Y), The upper prize winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step Y853), the fraud monitoring out-of-time flag is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and the process proceeds to step Y857. Also, if it is not a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (step Y 852; N), that is, if it is a small hit that opens the lower large winning opening (second special variation winning device 39), the lower large winning opening illegal prize A number area is cleared (step Y 855), a fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step Y 856), and the process proceeds to step Y 857. Then, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process (step Y 857) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is ended.

  If it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), it is a high probability final change, that is, the last special drawing for which the lottery in the high probability state was performed It is determined whether it is a variable display game (step Y858). If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y 858; N), the process proceeds to step Y 866. If the final change is a high probability (step Y 858; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y 859), and rendering command setting processing is performed (step Y 860). Then, save the probability information command (low probability) in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y861), clear the left hitting instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag (step Y862), and set the high probability state and time saving state. A signal relating to the end of is saved in the external information output data area (step Y863). Here, it is set to turn off the jackpot 2 signal.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is in the small hit, that is, the second special game state based on the small hit generated in the special figure 1 variable display game (step Y864). When it is in the small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y864; Y), it transfers to step Y867. Thus, the state of instructing to hit the right is maintained. In addition, when the small figure of special figure 1 is not being done (step Y864; N), the signal regarding left hitting indication is saved in the test signal output data field (step Y865), it is left hitting state in game state indication number 2 field Save the number (step Y866). Thereafter, clear the special figure 2 fluctuation of the special figure status area (subtract information) (step Y867), perform special process transition setting process 1 for special figure 2 (step Y868), and end the special figure 2 display processing. .

  That is, the first special game occurrence which generates the first special game state in which the game control device 100 opens the special variation winning device with the operation of the condition device based on the variation display game becoming the first special result. A second special game generating means for generating a second special game state for opening the special fluctuation winning device without activating the condition device based on the fact that the means is used and that the variable display game has become the second special result. It is eggplant.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 66 illustrates the details of the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing (steps Y776 and Y836) in the special figure 1 display process and the special figure 2 display process described above. In the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process, first, a signal regarding the start of the big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y 871). Here, the jackpot 1 signal to be output in the jackpot or jackpot is set to ON. Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (the state of reduced variation time of the special symbol) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF.

  Thereafter, the number-of-rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y 873), and the number in the low probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y 874). The special figure low probability flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

  Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of the power failure recovery (step Y876), and the special view fluctuation display executable in the high probability state The high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of games is cleared (step Y877). As a result, the high probability state and the short time state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

  Next, the information on the big hit is saved in the special view status area (step Y878), and the high probability final variation flag area is cleared (step Y879). Further, the signal regarding the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 880), and the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y 881). Thereafter, the common drawing low probability flag is saved in the common drawing game mode flag area (step Y 882), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process is ended.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process]
FIG. 67 shows the special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process (step Y 797) in the special figure 1 display process described above. In this special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process, first, "7" concerning small hit fanfare medium process is set as the process number (step Y891), and the process number is set as the special figure 1 game process number area. Save (step Y 892).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (step Y893), and a signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 4 signal to be output in the jackpot or jackpot are set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to ON.

  Thereafter, the small hit medium information is saved in the special view status information (step Y896), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special view small hit fanfare medium process transition setting processing is ended. Do.

[Special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 68 shows the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process (step Y 857) in the special figure 2 display process described above. In this special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process, first, "7" concerning small hit fanfare medium process is set as the process number (step Y901), and the process number is set as the special figure 2 game process number area. Save (step Y902).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903), and a signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 4 signal to be output in the jackpot or jackpot are set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

  Thereafter, the small hit medium information is saved in the special view status information (step Y 906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y 907), and the special view 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process is ended. Do.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
FIG. 69 shows fanfare / in-interval processing (steps Y111 and Y142) in the special view 1 game processing and the special view 2 game processing described above. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step Y951), and a round command corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y952). (Step Y953).

  Next, a big hit middle processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y 954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the big hit middle processing control pointer area (step Y 955). As the jackpot processing control pointer initial value, 0 is set when opening and closing are repeated in one round. Here, the fifth R corresponds to the 16R positive variation F3 (special figure 2 large winning opening opening and closing pattern 5). In addition, in the case of performing one continuous opening in one round, 21 which is the big hit operation end value is set. Note that the initial value may be set to other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

  Then, the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the processing number (step Y957). The open time set here is, for example, one of 200 ms, 600 ms, 1600 ms and 29000 ms.

  Next, it is judged whether it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y 958), and if it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y 958; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y 959) ), The special winning opening open time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y 960). On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y 958; N), save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y 961) and save the special winning opening open time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (Step Y962).

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the upper large winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) (step Y963). It is possible to determine whether it is a big hit for the upper large winning opening opening from the set large opening opening information. If it is a big hit of the opening of the big prize winning opening (step Y963; Y), the process setting setting processing during big winning opening open is performed (step Y964), and the fanfare / interval in progress processing is ended. If the big winning opening opening is not a big hit (step Y963; N), the big winning opening opening processing transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y965), and the fanfare / interval middle processing ends.

[In process opening setting process 1 during the big winning opening open]
FIG. 70 shows the process shift setting process 1 (step Y 964) during the opening of the special winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In the special winning opening open processing transition setting process 1, first, a signal regarding the opening start of the upper large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y971). Here, the special electric symbol 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper special winning opening on data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area in order to open the opening / closing member 38c of the first special variation winning device 38 (step Y972), and the number of winnings for the special winning opening is counted. The special winning opening count number is cleared (step Y 973), and the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[In process opening setting process 2 during the big winning opening open]
FIG. 71 shows the process setting for process transition during process opening setting 2 (step Y965) in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In the special winning opening open processing transition setting process 2, first, a signal regarding the opening start of the lower large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y981). Here, the special electric symbol 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower special winning opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area in order to open the opening / closing member 39c of the second special variation winning device 39 (step Y 982), and the number of winnings for the special winning opening is counted. The special winning opening count number is cleared (step Y 983), and the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing 2 is ended.

[Big winning opening open processing]
FIG. 72 shows the special winning opening open process (steps Y112 and Y143) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process described above. In this big winning opening open processing, first, the big hit medium processing control pointer is loaded (step Y1001), and it is judged whether the loaded value is equal to or more than the big hit operation end value (here, 21) (step Y1002).

  If the loaded value is not greater than the big hit operation end value (21 in this case) (step Y1002; N), perform the big hit operation shift setting process (step Y1003) and update the big hit middle processing control pointer by 1 (step Y1004) , The special winning opening open processing ends. In this case, the opening and closing is performed in one round, and the opening and closing mode of the special variation winning device is set according to the updated big hit and middle processing control pointer.

  On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the big hit operation end value (here, 21) (step Y1002; Y), the current number of rounds and the number of rounds upper limit of the round number upper limit area in the special gaming state being executed are To determine whether the current round is the final round (step Y1005). Then, if it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command relating to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and effect command setting processing (step Y1008) is performed. Also, if it is the final round (step Y1005; Y), prepare an ending command relating to the display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state (step Y1007), effect command setting processing (step Y1008) I do.

  Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the special winning opening information is set (step Y1009), and 5 for the special winning opening remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1010). As the remaining sphere processing time, 600 ms, 800 ms or 1400 ms is set. And it is determined whether it is a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1011).

  If it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011; Y), save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012) and save the remaining ball processing time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1012) Step Y1013). On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1011; N), save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1014) and save the remaining ball processing time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (Step Y1015).

  Thereafter, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the special winning opening open processing is ended. In step Y1016, the off data is set for both the upper large winning opening solenoid and the lower large winning opening solenoid, and the process for closing any large winning opening is performed.

[Big hit operation shift setting processing]
FIG. 73 shows the big hit operation shift setting process (step Y1004) in the above-mentioned big winning opening open process. In this big hit operation shift setting processing, first, branch processing is performed depending on whether the value of the big hit / middle processing control pointer is even or odd (step Y1021). Here, branch processing is performed assuming that 0 is an even number.

  If it is determined in step Y1021 that the value of the big hit middle process control pointer is even, the wait time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1022). Here, 1500 ms is set as the wait time. Note that different wait times may be set depending on the value of the pointer. Next, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1023), and the process moves to step Y1026. In step Y1023, off data is set for both the upper large winning opening solenoid and the lower large winning opening solenoid, and processing for closing any large winning opening is performed.

  On the other hand, when the value of the big hit middle processing control pointer is odd in step Y1021, the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1024). Here, 200 ms is set if the value of the big hit middle processing control pointer is 1 to 19 as the big winning opening opening time, and 25000 ms is set if it is 21. Next, the upper winning prize opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1025), and the process shifts to step Y1026. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, only the upper large winning opening (the first special variation winning device 38) is repeatedly opened and closed during one round, so the step Y 1024 saves on data for the upper large winning opening solenoid. doing. Of course, depending on the setting of the gaming machine, the opening and closing of the lower large winning opening (the second special variation winning device 39) may be repeated in one round.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1026), and if it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1026; Y), the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area ( Step Y1027), the big hit operation shift setting processing ends. If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1026; N), the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1028), and the big hit operation shift setting process is ended. The above processing makes it possible to repeat the opening and closing of the special winning opening in one round.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
FIG. 74 shows the special winning hole remaining ball processing (steps Y113 and Y144) in the special drawing 1 game processing and the special drawing 2 game processing described above. In this special winning opening residual ball processing, first, the current round number in the special gaming state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round (Step Y1041).

  Then, if the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), the signal regarding the end of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, an interval time corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds this time is set (step Y1043), and 3 for fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step Y1044).

  The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of the round to the remaining ball processing time, and from the elapse of the remaining ball processing time to the interval time. For example, in the special figure 1 large winning a prize opening opening and closing pattern 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400ms and the interval time of 600ms are set, the interval period becomes 2000ms, and in this interval period, interval effect is displayed on the display device 41 etc. Is executed.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step Y1041; Y), the big hit end processing shift setting processing is performed (step Y1045), and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y1046), 6 is set as the processing number according to the special figure 1 big hit end process or the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y 1047).

  And it is determined whether it is a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1048). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1048; Y), save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), save the set time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y 1050), finish the special winning opening remaining ball processing. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1048; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area ( Step Y1052), finish the special winning opening remaining ball processing.

  The ending period from the end of the last round to the end of the special game state is a period from the end of the last round to the passage of the remaining ball processing time, and the period from the passage of the remaining ball processing time to the ending time. For example, since the remaining ball processing time of 1,400 ms and the ending time of 9,600 ms are set in the special figure 1 large winning opening / closing pattern 1, the ending period is 11,000 ms, and in this ending period, the ending effect is produced by the display device 41 etc. Is executed.

[Big hit end processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 75 shows the big hit end processing shift setting process (step Y1045) in the above-mentioned big winning opening residual ball process. In the big hit end process shift setting process, first, a signal related to the open end of the big winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF.

  Next, clear the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (step Y1072), clear the information on the round number area storing the round number of the special gaming state (step Y1073) ), Clears the information of the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number of the special gaming state (step Y1074).

  Then, clear the information of the round number upper limit value information area storing the flag for upper limit value determination of the round number (step Y1075), and of the special winning opening open information area storing the flag for opening information determination of the special winning opening The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information on the big hit middle control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the big hit end processing shift setting process is ended.

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 76 shows the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y114) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 big hit end process, first, “0” is set as a process number related to the special figure 1 normal process (step Y1101), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1102).

  Next, a signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1103). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (general charge support state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1104). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is to be continued.

  Thereafter, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1105). Here, the condition device operating signal, the character continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 signal and the special symbol 2 signal are set to OFF. Next, signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1106). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal are set to ON.

  Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1107). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number in the high probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y1108). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the time saving state is always performed during the high probability, these are not distinguished here but are the numbers in the high probability. Thereafter, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1109), and the number of off is stored in the round LED pointer area (step Y1110).

  Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1111), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1112), The special drawing status area is cleared (step Y1113). It should be noted that, by clearing the special view status area, the special view status 0 indicates that neither the special view 1 variation display game nor the special view 2 variation display game is being executed.

  Thereafter, the high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1114), and the high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game is executed in the high probability state is an initial value (here, 50). ) Is saved (step Y1115). Furthermore, save the probability information command (high probability) in the power failure recovery send command area (step Y1116), save the special figure 2 game wait time value (here 8 ms) in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), the common drawing high probability flag is saved in the common drawing game mode flag area (step Y1118), and the special drawing 1 big hit end processing is ended.

  The special view variation display game can be started for any of the special view 1 and the special view 2 by performing the special view 1 big hit end process, but in the timer interrupt process, the special view 2 game is performed after the special view 1 game process. In order to perform processing, processing to start the special view variation display game is performed in the special view 2 game processing with the timer interrupt which has performed special view 1 big hit end processing, and the special view 2 variation display game is performed than the special view 1 variation display game Will be able to start earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1117, the start process for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process, The variable display game and the special view 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt. Note that the special figure 2 variable game may be started earlier by setting the special figure 2 game wait time value.

  In other words, the second variable display game execution control unit continues the process until the first variable display game execution control unit can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game after the end of the special game state. (2) A game processing standby means is provided to prevent the processing relating to the start of the variable display game from being made executable.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 77 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. This special figure 2 big hit end processing is the same processing except that step Y1117 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit processing is not done.

  First, "0" is set as a process number relating to the special figure 2 routine process (step Y1121), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1122). Next, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1123). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (general charge support state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1124). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is to be continued.

  Thereafter, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1125). Here, the condition device operating signal, the character continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 signal and the special symbol 2 signal are set to OFF. Next, signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal are set to ON.

  Then, the signal related to the right-handed command is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1127). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number in the high probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y1128). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the time saving state is always performed during the high probability, these are not distinguished here but are the numbers in the high probability. Thereafter, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1129), and the number of extinguished is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1130).

  Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1131), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1132), The special drawing status area is cleared (step Y1133). It should be noted that, by clearing the special view status area, the special view status 0 indicates that neither the special view 1 variation display game nor the special view 2 variation display game is being executed.

  Thereafter, the high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1134), and the high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of times of execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state is an initial value (here, 50). ) Is saved (step Y1135). Furthermore, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y1136), and the general drawing high probability flag is saved in the general drawing game mode flag area (step Y1137). End the process.

  A special gaming state which is a high probability state and a time saving state is set by the special figure 1 big hit process and the special figure 2 big hit process until 50 special figure variation display games are executed after the end of the first special game state It will be. That is, the specific gaming state generation means capable of generating a specific gaming state in which the game control apparatus 100 has a probability of the result of the variable display game becoming a special result for a predetermined period after the end of the special gaming state. I Further, the specific gaming state generation means is configured to increase the probability that the result of the variable display game will be the first special result over the predetermined state as the specific gaming state, as compared to the normal state.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle process (steps Y115 and Y146) in the special view 1 game process and the special view 2 game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in the small hit fanfare medium process, first, branching is performed according to the open pattern (step Y1201).

  If the opening pattern is small hit 1 (special figure 1 lower large winning opening opening and closing pattern 1) at step Y1201, prepare a small hitting open command of lower large winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) opening, (Step Y1202), rendering command setting processing is performed (Step Y1203). Next, the small hit 8 during the small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1204), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1205).

  Thereafter, the small hit open time 1 (here, 48 ms) is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (step Y1206), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1207). Here, the special electric symbol 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower winning prize opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1208), and the process shifts to step Y1230.

  In addition, when the opening pattern is small hit 2 (special figure 2 lower large winning opening opening and closing pattern 2) in step Y1201, the small hitting open command of the lower large winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) opening It prepares (step Y1209) and performs rendering command setting processing (step Y1210). Next, the small hit 8 during the small hit process is set as the process number (step Y1211), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1212).

  Thereafter, the small hit open time 2 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special view 2 game processing timer area (step Y1213), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1214). Here, the special electric symbol 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower winning prize opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1215), and the process shifts to step Y1230.

  In addition, when the opening pattern is small hit 3 (special figure 2 upper large winning a prize opening and closing pattern 6) in step Y1201, small hitting open command of upper large winning a prize opening (1st special fluctuation winning a prize device 38) opening Preparation is performed (step Y1216), and rendering command setting processing is performed (step Y1217). Next, the small hit 8 during the small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1218), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1219).

  Thereafter, the small hit open time 3 (here, 1200 ms) is saved in the special view 2 game processing timer area (step Y1220), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1221). Here, the special electric symbol 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper winning prize opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1222), and the process shifts to step Y1230.

  In addition, when the opening pattern is small hit 4 (special figure 2 upper winning a prize opening opening and closing pattern 7) in step Y1201, the small hitting open command of the opening of the upper large winning a prize opening (first special variation winning device 38) It prepares (step Y1223), and performs rendering command setting processing (step Y1224). Next, the small hit 8 during the small hit process is set as the process number (step Y1225), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1226).

  Thereafter, the small hit open time 4 (1600 ms here) is saved in the special view 2 game processing timer area (step Y1227), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1228). Here, the special electric symbol 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper winning prize opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1229), and the process shifts to step Y1230. After processing according to these small hit types, the large winning opening count number area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1230), and the small hit fanfare middle processing is ended.

[Small hit during processing]
FIG. 79 shows the small hit middle processing (steps Y116 and Y147) in the special drawing 1 game processing and the special drawing 2 game processing described above. In the small hit middle process, first, a small hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y1242). Next, branching is performed according to the open pattern (step Y1243).

  If the opening pattern is small hit 1 (special figure 1 lower large winning opening opening and closing pattern 1) in step Y1243, set 9 for the small hit remaining ball processing as the processing number (step Y1244), and special figure 1 The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (step Y1245). Then, the small hit residual ball processing time 1 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (step Y1246), the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1247), End processing during hit.

  If the open pattern is small hit 2 (special figure 2 lower large winning opening opening and closing pattern 2) in step Y1243, set 9 for the small hit remaining ball processing as the processing number (step Y 1248), and special figure 2 The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (step Y1249). The small hit residual ball processing time 2 (here 600 ms) is saved in the special view 2 game processing timer area (step Y1250), the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1251), End processing during hit.

  If the opening pattern is small hit 3 or 4 (special figure 2 large winning opening opening and closing pattern 6 or 7) in step Y1243, set 9 for the small hit remaining ball processing as the processing number (step Y1252) The special processing number 2 game processing number area saves the processing number (step Y1253). Then, small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (here 800 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1254), off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1255), small End processing during hit.

  In steps Y1247, Y1251 and Y1255, the off data is set for both the upper large winning opening solenoid and the lower large winning opening solenoid, and processing for closing any large winning opening is performed.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
FIG. 80 shows small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117 and Y148) in the special drawing 1 game processing and the special drawing 2 game processing described above. In this small hit residual ball processing, first, it is judged whether it is a small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271). If it is a small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271; Y), set 10 for the special figure 1 small hit end process as the process number (step Y1272), and set the process number to the special figure 1 game process number area. Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hit ending time (here 100 ms) is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the process goes to step Y1278.

  If the special figure 1 is not a small hit (step Y1271; N), set 10 for the special figure 2 small hit process as the process number (step Y1275), and set the process number to the special figure 2 game process number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time (100 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the process goes to step Y1278.

  Then, a signal regarding the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal are set to OFF. Further, the special winning opening count number area is cleared (step Y 1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing is ended.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 81 shows the special figure 1 small hitting end process (step Y118) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 for the special figure 1 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1301), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1302).

  Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special drawing status area is cleared (step Y1306). By clearing the special view status area, special view status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special view 1 variation display game nor the special view 2 variation display game is being executed is obtained.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the high probability is in progress (step Y1307), and if it is in the high probability (step Y1307; Y), the process proceeds to step Y1310. If not high probability (step Y1307; N), the signal regarding the left-handed indication is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, save the number in the left hitting state in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1309), and save the special figure 2 game wait time value (here 8 ms) in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1310) . Here too, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, the start process for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process, and the special figure 1 variable display game The special figure 2 variation display game is processed by the same timer interrupt. Note that the special figure 2 variable game may be started earlier by setting the special figure 2 game wait time value. Thereafter, a signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1311), and the special figure 1 small hit end process is ended. Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 4 signal are set to OFF.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 82 shows the special figure 2 small hitting end process (step Y149) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 is set for the special figure 2 normal process as a process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

  Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1335). Thereafter, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1336), and the special view status area is cleared (step Y1337). By clearing the special view status area, special view status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special view 1 variation display game nor the special view 2 variation display game is being executed is obtained.

  Next, it is judged whether or not high probability is in progress (step Y1338), and in the case of high probability being in progress (step Y1338; Y), the special figure 2 small hitting end processing is ended. If not high probability (step Y1338; N), the signal regarding the left-handed indication is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1339). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, save the number in the left hitting state in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1340), save the signal related to the end of the small hit in the external information output data area (step Y1341), the special figure 2 small hit end End the process. Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 4 signal are set to OFF.

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 83 shows symbol variation control processing (steps Y120 and Y153) in the special view 1 game processing and the special view 2 game processing described above. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52 and setting the display data of the special symbol. In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is varying (step Y1401).

  And, when the fluctuation control flag is fluctuating (step Y1402; Y), the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the symbol of the control object is acquired (step Y1403), the blinking control timer concerning the symbol of the control object Is updated by -1 (step Y1404), and it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, the time is up (step Y1405).

  If the value of the blink control timer is not 0 (step Y1405; N), the process proceeds to step Y1408. If the value of the blink control timer is 0 (step Y1405; Y), the blink control timer initial value (100 ms here) is saved in the blink control timer area to be controlled (step Y1406), and the symbol to be controlled is displayed. The variation symbol number according to is updated by +1 (step Y1407), and display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area of interest is acquired (step Y1408). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the change control flag is not changing (step Y1402; N), the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1409). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step Y1410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is ended. As a result, a special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special view display to be controlled among the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special view 1 reserve display 54, the special view 2 reserve display 55, the general drawing reserve display 75, the first gaming state display 76, and the second gaming state display provided in the collective display device 50. The setting related to the drive of the segment LED constituting the unit 77 and the round display unit 60 is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 84, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blink control timer is updated by +1 (step X581), and it is determined whether the output on timing is based on whether the specific bit of the blink control timer is 1 or not. (Step X582). In the present embodiment, when the bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on timing, thereby creating a blinking cycle of 128 ms.

  If the output is on timing (step X 582; Y), the common drawing reservation number display table 1 of the common drawing reservation number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode in the common drawing reservation display is defined is set (Step X583) If the output on timing is not reached (Step X582; N), the common drawing reserve number display table 2 is set (Step X584). Then, display data corresponding to the common drawing reservation number is acquired from the set common drawing reservation number display table and saved in the segment area of the common drawing reservation display unit (step X585). In the present embodiment, if the common drawing reserve number is any one of “0” to “2”, the display data becomes the same regardless of which common drawing reserve number display table is set.

  Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step X586), and in the case of the output on timing (step X586; Y), the special figure 1 reserve number in which the display mode on the special figure 1 reserve display is defined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 reservation number display table 1 is set (step X587), and when the output on timing is not (step X586; N), the special figure 1 reservation number display table 2 is set ( Step X 588). Then, display data corresponding to the special drawing 1 holding number is acquired from the set special drawing 1 holding number display table and saved in the segment area of the special drawing 1 holding display (step X589).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step X 590), and in the case of the output on timing (step X 590; Y), the special figure 2 reserve number display in which the display mode on the special figure 2 reserve display is defined. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 pending number display table 1 is set (step X591), and when it is not the output on timing (step X590; N), the special figure 2 pending number display table 2 is set (step X 592). Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 pending number is acquired from the set special figure 2 pending number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 pending display (step X593).

  Furthermore, a round display table in which the display mode in the round display unit is defined is set (step X594), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the round display unit (step X595) ).

  Next, the game state display table 1 is set in which the display mode in the second game state display unit 58 is lit to notify the occurrence of the time reduction state when the time reduction state occurs (step X596), the game state display number The display data corresponding to is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first gaming state display unit (step X597). In the present embodiment, the first gaming state display unit consisting of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal operation and to be turned on during special display time (short during power support).

  After that, the gaming state display table 2 is set in which the display mode in the second gaming state display section is notified that the gaming state is more advantageous to the right hitting than the left hitting (step X598). The display data corresponding to the state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second gaming state display unit (step X599), and the segment LED editing process is ended. In the present embodiment, the second gaming state display unit consisting of one LED is turned off at the time of normal hitting (left hitting) and right hitting (in the case of the present embodiment, during the big hit, during the small hit, during the common charge support) ) Is configured to light up.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
FIG. 85 shows the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start or the end of fraud notification is set.

  In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch) is turned on from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), that is, abnormal magnetism It is determined whether it is in a detected state (step X611). If the magnet sensor is on (step X611; Y), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 and the timer is timed up. It determines (step X613).

  If the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step X613; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X614), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( Here, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step X615). Then, a command of magnet informing notification is prepared (step X616), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X617), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region. (Step X613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously on for a predetermined period (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch) is not on (step X611; N), that is, if abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X618), and notification time of magnet fraud is notified. If the specified magnet fraud alerting timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X619). The minimum value of the magnet fraud alert timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is 0 (step X620). If the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step X613; N), the processing also proceeds to step X619.

  Then, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X620; N), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. In addition, if the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is 0 (step X620; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time is up, the fraud alert period is over or the fraud alert is from the beginning. If it is not performed, a command for magnet informing end is prepared (step X621). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X622), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step X623).

  Then, if the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step X623; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. If the values do not match (step X623; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step X624), rendering command setting processing is performed (step X625), and the magnet fraud monitoring processing is ended. Do.

[Board radio wave fraud monitoring processing]
FIG. 86 shows the board radio wave illegal monitoring process (step X114) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, and the start and the end of the fraud notification are set.

  In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the board radio wave sensor 62 is output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and from the state of the detection signal taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121. It is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (step X631). If the board radio wave sensor is on (step X631; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud alert timer initial value (60000 ms in this case) is saved in the radio wave fraud alert timer area (step X632).

  Then, prepare a command of board radio wave fraud notification (step X633), prepare a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X634), and prepare the prepared board radio wave fraud flag with the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region. It is determined whether they match (step X639). That is, in the case of radio wave cheating, unlike in the case of magnetic cheating, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the board radio wave sensor is not on (step X631; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer defining the notification time of radio wave fraud is not 0 and -1 is updated ( Step X 635). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is 0 (step X636).

  If the value of the radio wave injustice timer is not 0 (step X636; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave improper monitoring process is ended. If the value of the radio wave informing timer is 0 (step X 636; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time has already been up, and the period of the informing is over, or the injustice is notified from the beginning. If not done, prepare a command of the end of board radio wave fraud notification (step X637), prepare a board radio wave fraud release flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X638), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is a board radio wave It is determined whether the value of the incorrect flag area matches the value (step X639).

  Then, if the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region (step X639; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing is ended. If the values do not match (step X639; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X640), effect command setting processing is performed (step X641), and board radio wave fraud monitoring End the process.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 87 shows the external information editing process (step X115) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the external information editing process, the monitoring result in payout command transmission process (step X105), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step X108), magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113), board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114), etc. On the basis of the above, the information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game arcade internal control device or a test shot test device is created and set in an output buffer.

  In this external information editing process, first, it is determined whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701), and when the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step X701; N), the main frame (front frame 12) ) It is determined whether an open error is occurring (step X702). If the main frame opening error is not occurring (step X702; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X703), and the off data of the security signal is external information The file is saved in the output data area (step X704), and the process proceeds to step X707.

  On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step X 701; Y) or when the body frame (front frame 12) opening error is occurring (step X 702; Y), the door / frame opening signal is The on data is saved in the external information output data area (step X705), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X706), and the process proceeds to step X707. That is, the information in which the glass frame 14 and the front frame 12 are open is output as the external information.

  Next, the security signal control timer, which counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch, etc. ). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0.

  Then, if the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X708; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710). Transition. As a result, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information. In addition, if the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step X 708; Y), is it during occurrence of frame radio wave irregularity that is detection of abnormal radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12? Is determined (step X709).

  If frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; Y), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. If the frame radio wave irregularity is not occurring (step X709; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of the switch is occurring (step X711). When the switch abnormality error is not occurring (step X711; N), the process proceeds to step X713. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (step X711; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X712), and the process proceeds to step X713.

  And if it corresponds to at least one of a magnet fraud occurrence (step X713; Y), a board radio wave fraud occurrence (step X714; Y) and a big winning opening fraud occurrence (step X715; Y), the security signal The on data is saved in the external information output data area (step X718), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X719), and the process proceeds to step X720. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information. If none of the errors in steps X713 to X715 has occurred, the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X717), and the process proceeds to step X720.

  The starting opening 1 signal editing process (step X720) for editing the winning signal to the first starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 signal editing process (step X721) for editing the winning signal to the normal variation winning device 37 2) A starting opening 3 signal editing process (step X722) is performed to edit a winning signal to the starting winning opening 97. Next, main prize ball signal editing processing (step X 723) is performed to set information related to the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out, and symbol determination number signal editing processing is performed to set information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game. Then (step X724), the external information editing process is ended.

[Starting opening 1 signal editing process]
FIG. 88 shows the start port 1 signal editing process (step X720) in the above-mentioned external information editing process. In this starting opening 1 signal editing process, first, if the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X731). The minimum value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732). When the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of starting opening 1 signal output is 0 (step X733).

  Then, if the start opening 1 signal output number is not 0 (step X733; N), the start opening 1 signal output number is updated by -1 (step X734), and the start opening 1 signal output is made in the start opening 1 signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step X735). The start opening 1 signal output control timer initial value is the time obtained by adding the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) of the start port signal and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) (For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the starting opening 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X737), and the starting opening 1 signal editing process is ended. If the number of start port 1 signal outputs is 0 (step X733; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM (step X738) ), The start opening 1 signal editing process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start opening 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (step X732; N), it is determined whether the start 1 port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X736). The fact that the start opening 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the start opening 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X736; Y), the process proceeds to step X737. If the start port 1 signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X736; N), save the off data for turning off the start port 1 signal for the external device in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (step X738), the start opening 1 signal editing process is ended. The start opening 2 signal editing process (step X 721) and the start opening 3 signal editing process (step X 722) in the above-mentioned external information editing process are the same as the start opening 1 signal editing process. Perform for 3 signals.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
FIG. 89 shows the main prize ball signal editing process (step X723) in the above-mentioned external information editing process. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (predetermined number of payouts) generated by the winning to the winning opening becomes a predetermined number (here 10) to the external device It is a process.

  In this main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X741). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of main prize ball signal output is 0 (step X743).

  When the main prize ball signal output number is not 0 (step X743; N), the main prize ball signal output number is updated by 1 (step X744), and the main prize ball signal output is output to the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step X745). The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is obtained by adding the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) of the main prize ball signal and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X747), and the main prize ball signal editing process is ended. If the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (step X743; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X 748), The main prize ball signal editing process is finished.

  On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step X742; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X746). Note that the main prize ball signal output control timer being in the output ON period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X746; Y), the process proceeds to step X747. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X746; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (step X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is finished.

[Pattern fixed number signal editing process]
FIG. 90 shows symbol determination frequency signal editing processing (step X724) in the above-mentioned external information editing processing. The symbol determination number signal editing process is a process for controlling an output time of information relating to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game.

  In this symbol determination frequency signal editing process, first, if the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X751). The minimum value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752). If the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is 0 (step X 752; Y), it is determined whether the number of symbol determination frequency signal outputs, which is incremented by +1 every time the special view variation display game is 0, is 0 (Step X753).

  Then, when the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is not 0 (step X753; N), the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is updated by -1 (step X754), and the main prize ball signal output is in the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step X755). The symbol determination frequency signal output control timer initial value is the time when the symbol determination frequency signal is on (for example, high level) (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 ms) It is time (192 ms here).

  Thereafter, the on data for turning on the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X757), and the symbol determination frequency signal editing process is ended. When the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is 0 (step X753; Y), the off data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X758) The symbol determination number signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0 (step X752; N), it is determined whether the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X756). The symbol determination frequency signal output control timer being in the output ON period means that the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. If the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X756; Y), the process proceeds to step X757. If the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X756; N), the off data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (step X748), the symbol determination number signal editing process is ended.

  Next, the effects on the display device 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 91A, at the center of the display area of the display device 41, an ornament special game variation display game display unit 85 for displaying an ornament special game variation display game set to the main display symbol is provided. The decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 displays the decoration special figure variation display game by variably displaying identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then displaying the identification information in a stop state.

  The decoration special figure variation display game includes an decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and a decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game. In the effect control device 300, one of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is set as the main display symbol, and the other is set as the sub display symbol. Depending on the state of the game, the effect control device 300 can set which one of the special display 1 and the special image 2 is to be used as the main display symbol, and can also be set by operating the effect button 25 by a player or the like. .

  At the upper left portion of the display area, a second decoration game display unit 88 for displaying the decoration special figure variation display game set to the sub display symbol is provided. In the second decoration game display unit 88, a special figure 1 second decoration game display unit 88a for displaying a decoration special figure 1 variation display game, and a special figure 2 second decoration game for displaying a decoration special figure 2 variation display game A display unit 88 b is provided, and it is possible to determine which special view is set as the sub display symbol according to the display position. The second decoration game displayed on each of the special view 1 second decoration game display unit 88a and the special view 2 second decoration game display unit 88b of the second decoration game display unit 88 is a decoration special view variation display game display unit Similar to 85, the identification information is variably displayed in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area, and then the display is stopped and the result is displayed.

  In FIG. 91 (a), for the purpose of explanation, it is assumed that the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed on both the special drawing 1 second decoration game display unit 88a and the special drawing 2 second decoration game display unit 88b. However, in fact, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the display portion corresponds to only the decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view (special view 2 in FIG. 91 (b)) set to the sub display symbol Is displayed on. Of course, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), it is also possible to always display the decoration special figure variation display game of both special drawings. Further, the arrangement of the special figure 1 second decoration game display unit 88a and the special figure 2 second decoration game display unit 88b is not limited to the arrangement shown here, but may be different positions in the display area. In the second decoration game display unit 88, the special view 1 second decoration game display unit 88a and the special view 2 second decoration game display unit 88b are different display units. Among the display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the decoration special figure fluctuation display game set to the sub display symbol may be displayed.

  In addition, as for the special feature variation display game display unit 85, the display unit for displaying the special feature 1 variation display game and the display unit for displaying the special feature 2 variation display game may be different display units. good. In addition, it is not possible to distinguish the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the position of the display in the decorative special figure variation display game display part 85 or the second decorative game display part 88, but it is possible to It may be made to distinguish by making it differ by FIG. 1 and special figure 2. FIG. In addition, information indicating which one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed may be displayed, or it may be determined by the sound of a background, a lamp, BGM or the like.

  Further, at the lower center of the display area, there is provided a storage display unit 83 for displaying a decoration special view start storage display corresponding to the start storage. The storage display unit 83 is provided with a first storage display unit 83a for displaying the first start storage and a second storage display unit 83b for displaying the second start storage. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the first memory display unit 83a corresponds to the first start memory in a one-to-one correspondence and is displayed side by side in the order of memory, and here, there are three first start memories It is shown that. The decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end is the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory stored first, and is shifted to the left each time it is digested.

  Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special view 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to each start memory and the prefetching result such as the fluctuation pattern by the display mode. In FIG. 91 (a), a pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is performed for the first start memory whose digest order is the first. Further, the second storage display unit 83b displays the decoration special view start storage display corresponding to the second start storage in a one-on-one manner as the first storage display unit 83a. Here, it is indicated that there are three second starting memories.

  A first in-progress storage display portion 84a is provided on the left side of the first storage display portion 83a to display information on the starting storage corresponding to the currently running special view 1 variable display game. It is done. A special figure start change display at the left end of the first memory display portion 83a is shifted to the first in-execution storage display portion 84a at the start of the special view 1 variable display game, and the special view 1 change display game is executed. The result or fluctuation pattern etc. are suggested by the display mode.

  A second in-progress storage display portion 84b is provided on the left side of the second storage display portion 83b, which forms an in-progress storage display portion 84 for displaying information related to starting storage corresponding to the special view 2 variable display game currently being executed. It is done. The second special display start memory display at the left end of the second storage display section 83b is shifted to the second in-execution storage display section 84b at the start of the special view 2 variable display game, and the special view 2 variable display game is executed. The result or fluctuation pattern etc. are suggested by the display mode.

  In the upper right portion of the display area, a starting memory number display unit 86 for displaying the starting memory number is provided. The starting memory number display unit 86 is provided with a first starting memory number displaying unit 86a for displaying the number of first starting memory and a second starting memory number displaying unit 86b for displaying the number of second starting memory. ing.

  FIGS. 91 (b) to 91 (h) show an example of display when the special figure variation display game is being executed. When the first starting memory is digested and reduced from the state shown in FIG. 91 (a), the decorative special drawing start storing display at the left end of the first storage display portion 83a is in the first execution as shown in FIG. 91 (b). Display is performed to flow into the storage display unit 84a. Here, also in the first in-progress storage display unit 84a, the result, the variation pattern, and the like of the special view variation display game are suggested in the same manner as in the pre-reading effect. Further, in the starting memory number display unit 86, the numerical value of the first starting memory number display unit 86a is decreased by one. Furthermore, the special figure 1 is set as the main display symbol here, and the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is an decorative special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game based on the first start memory. The variable display of identification information is started in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas.

  When the second start-up memory is digested and reduced from the state shown in FIG. 91 (a), the decorative special-design start memory display at the left end of the second memory display 83b is second as shown in FIG. 91 (b). During the execution, display is performed to flow into the storage display unit 84b. Here, in the second in-progress storage display unit 84b, the result of the special view variation display game, the variation pattern, and the like are not suggested. Further, in the starting memory number display unit 86, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display unit 86b is decreased by one. Furthermore, the special figure 2 is set to the sub display symbol here, and the special figure variation display game is displayed only on the special figure 2 second decorative game display section 88b in the second decorative game display section 88. 2 The second decorative game display unit 88b starts the decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special view 2 variable display game based on the second start memory, and identification information is displayed in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas The variable display is started.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (c), in the decorative special-image variation display game display unit 85, first, the identification information is temporarily stopped in the left variation display area. In the temporary stop state, the identification information is displayed so as to shake, indicating that the stop has not been completely stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (d), the identification information temporarily stops in the right change display area. Here, in the reach state where the same identification information stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, reach effect is started. Of course, different identification information may be stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area and the reach state may not be reached. As described above, the first half fluctuation until the right fluctuation display area temporarily stops in the reach state is the second half fluctuation after that.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (e), the identification information is temporarily stopped in the middle variation display area, and the identification information is temporarily stopped in all the variation display areas of the decorative feature variation display game display unit 85. Note that the temporarily stopped state is equivalent to that during variable display, and here, it is still in the state of variable display. Thereafter, when the variation time of the special view 1 variation display game is over, as shown in FIG. 91 (f), the identification information of the decorative special view variation display game display unit 85 is stopped, and the result mode is displayed.

  Furthermore, the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game ends with the end of the stop time of the special drawing 1 fluctuation display game. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 91 (g), the display of the first in-progress storage display portion 84a is erased, and the next decoration special figure 1 variation display game can be started. Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (h), the special view 1 variation display game is started based on the new first start storage, and the decorative special view variation display game display unit 85 starts the corresponding decoration special view 1 variation display game Be done.

  Also, in the second decoration game display unit 88, the decoration special view variable display game is executed in the same manner as the decoration special figure change display game display unit 85, and as shown in FIG. 91 (c) The identification information temporarily stops in the area, and the identification information temporarily stops in the right area as shown in FIG. 91 (d). In the temporary stop state, the identification information is displayed so as to shake, indicating that the stop has not been completely stopped.

  After that, the middle area is temporarily stopped, and the identification information is temporarily stopped in all the variable display areas of the decorative special game variable display game display unit 85. Note that the state of temporary stop is equivalent to that during variable display. Thereafter, when the variation time of the special view 2 variation display game is over, as shown in FIG. 91 (e), the identification information of the second decoration game display section 88 is stopped, and the result mode is displayed.

  Furthermore, the decoration special figure 2 variation display game ends with the end of the stop time of the special figure 2 variation display game. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 91 (f), the display of the second in-progress storage display portion 84b is erased, and the next decoration special figure 2 variation display game can be started. Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (g), the special view 2 change display game is started based on the new second start storage, and the second decorative game display unit 88 starts the corresponding decoration special view 2 change display game . The special figure 1 variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 second decoration game display unit 88a in the same manner.

  Since the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed independently and simultaneously, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to these is also independently executed simultaneously. Then, if the result of one of the special figure variation display games is a special result (big hit or small hit), the other special figure variation display game is forced to be ended with the result of being out, and it becomes a special game state. In this case, the decoration special figure variation display game is also forcibly stopped, and the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the main display symbol in the state of FIG. 91 (f) is a special result (big hit or small hit) If so, the special result variation display game display unit 85 displays the special result, and the decorative special view variation display game in the second decoration game display unit 88 corresponding to the sub display symbol ends with the result of losing.

  Also, if the result of the special view variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol in the state of FIG. 91 (e) is a special result (big hit or small hit), the second decorative game display unit 88 displays the special result and the main The decorative special figure variation display game on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 corresponding to the display pattern is ended with the result of losing. In this case, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are exchanged after the special pattern change display game corresponding to the sub display symbol is ended, and the special result displayed on the second decoration game display unit 88 is the decorative special symbol change display game After being displayed on the display unit 85, a special game state is set. By this, it is made clear to the player that the special result has been derived. In this case, skip effects may be performed as described in FIG.

  Further, if there is no start memory corresponding to the sub display symbol in the state of FIG. 91 (f), the special view variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol is not executed, and the second decoration game display is performed until new start memory is generated. The part 88 remains in the state of displaying the result. Similarly, if there is no start memory corresponding to the main display symbol in the state of FIG. 91 (g), the special view variation display game corresponding to the main display symbol is not executed. In this case, if the special view variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol is being executed, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are interchanged.

  As a result, the decorative special view variation display game being displayed on the second decorative game display unit 88 is displayed on the decorative special view variation display game display unit 85. Further, in the second decoration game display unit 88, the result displayed on the decoration special view variation display game display unit 85 is displayed corresponding to the special view changed to the sub display symbol. That is, in the situation where only one special figure variation display game is executed, the special figure variation display game to be executed is made to be the main display symbol. Of course, the decoration special figure variation display game may be executed only by the decoration game display unit 88 without making such a change. Further, if there is no start memory corresponding to the main display symbol in the state of FIG. 91 (g) and the special view variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol is not executed either, it will be in the customer waiting state.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to switch the main display symbol and the sub display symbol by pressing the effect button 25. FIG. 92 shows an example of display on the display device 41 when the main display symbol is changed based on the player's operation of the effect button 25.

  In FIG. 92 (a), the special view 1 is the main display symbol and the special view 2 is the sub display symbol, and the special view variation display game is being executed in any of the main display symbol and the sub display symbol. . In the second decoration game display unit 88, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed only on the special drawing 2 second decoration game display unit 88b.

  When the player presses the effect button 25 in this state, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are switched. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), the display of the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 moves to the second decoration game display unit 88, and the display of the second decoration game display unit 88 becomes decoration special drawing An effect of moving to the variable display game display unit 85 is performed, and the display of each other is switched as shown in FIG. 92 (c). In this case, since the special figure 1 is the sub display symbol, the display of the decorative figure variation display game display unit 85 is moved to the special figure 1 second decorative game display unit 88a. Further, since the special figure 2 is the main display symbol, the display of the special figure 2 second decoration game display section 88b moves to the special figure variation display game display section 85, and the special figure 2 second decoration game display section 88b The special view variation display game is not displayed.

  Also, in FIG. 92 (d), the special view 1 is the main display symbol and the special view 2 is the sub display symbol, and the special view variation display game is executed in both the main display symbol and the sub display symbol. It is a state and it has shown the state where reach production is performed with the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation indicatory game. In this state, when the operation of the effect button 25 is performed during the reach effect, the display of the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decoration game display unit 88 as shown in FIG. 92 (e). As a result, the reach effect is not displayed as shown in FIG. 92 (f).

  Thereafter, when the effect button 25 is operated again, as shown in FIG. 92 (g), the display of the decorative feature variation display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decorative game display unit 88 are switched. In this case, since the special figure 2 is the sub display symbol, the display of the decorative figure variation display game display unit 85 is moved to the special figure 2 second decorative game display unit 88b. Further, since the special figure 1 is the main display symbol, the display of the special figure 1 second decoration game display unit 88a moves to the special figure variation display game display unit 85, and the special figure 1 second decoration game display unit 88a The special view variation display game is not displayed. Further, along with this change, the reach effect is resumed as shown in FIG. 92 (h). In this case, the reach effect is not resumed from the point of interruption in FIG. 92 (e), but is resumed from the point in time corresponding to the progress of the special view variation display game changed to the main display symbol.

  When a reach effect is performed as shown in FIG. 92 (d) and the decoration special view variable display game display unit 85 is displayed in a reduced size, the display unit of the corresponding special view in the second decoration game display unit 88 You may make it display a decoration special figure variation display game. For example, in the case of FIG. 92 (d), since the main display symbol is the special figure 1, the special figure variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 second ornamental game display section 88a instead of the special figure variation display game display section 85. You may display it.

  When the right area is stopped in the second decoration game display unit 88, the same identification information is stopped in the left area and the right area and the reach state is reached, as shown in FIG. 92 (f). It will be in the state which continues the display, but reach production is not displayed. When the special figure which is a subdisplay symbol in this state is changed to the main display symbol, the corresponding reach effect is performed from the time when it is changed as shown in FIG. 92 (h).

  As described above, since it is possible to switch the main display symbol and the sub display symbol according to the player's intention, the display can be made according to the player's preference, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 93 shows an example of the skip effect. The skip effect is an effect that appears based on the operation of the effect button 25 as if the special view variable display game has ended. As described above, when one special figure fluctuation display game is finished as a special result in a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are being executed, the other special figure fluctuation display game is forced It is supposed to be ended with the result of being removed. When such a forced stop is performed, a skip effect is performed to make it appear as if the forced stop is performed by the operation of the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The state shown in FIG. 93 (a) is a state in which both the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are in execution of the special view variation display game and the sub display symbol ends earlier than the main display symbol, and It is a state where the result of the sub display symbol is a special result. Here, the special view 1 is the main display symbol and the special view 2 is the sub display symbol, but the reverse may be possible. In this state, the skip effect is started when the remaining fluctuation time of the sub display symbol becomes a predetermined time. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), in the skip effect, an instruction display 94 for instructing the depression of the effect button 25 is performed, and the change in the remaining time of the period (specific period) in which the operation of the effect button 25 is possible In order to display on the screen, an operation period display 93 is performed which is a time bar in which a portion displayed in a specific color decreases with the passage of time.

  Then, when the effect button 25 is pressed, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are exchanged, and as shown in FIG. 93 (c), the identification information of the decorative special view variation display game display unit 85 is temporarily stopped It becomes. That is, the decoration feature displayed on the second decoration game display unit 88 (here, the special view 2 second decoration game display unit 88b) corresponding to the special view variation display game which is the sub display symbol in FIG. 93 (b). The figure variation display game is an ornament special view variation display game corresponding to the main display symbol in FIG. 93 (c) and displayed on the ornament special figure variation display game display unit 85 and temporarily stopped in the special result mode. .

  This makes it possible to make it look as if the special figure variation display game has ended based on the operation of the effect button 25. It should be noted that when the display of the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decoration game display unit 88 are interchanged, the effect shown in the movement shown in FIG. 92 is not performed. It can appear as if the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85 in b) is stopped halfway.

  At the time of FIG. 93 (c), since the variation time of the special view variation display game which is a special result is not finished, the identification information of the decorative special view variation display game display unit 85 is temporarily stopped, Since the special view variation display game corresponding to the special view has not been forcibly stopped, the variation display is continued on the second decoration game display unit 88 (here, the special view 1 second decoration game display unit 88a). .

  After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game to be the special result is ended, as shown in FIG. 93 (d), the identification information of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85 is stopped. In addition, since the other special figure fluctuation display game is compulsorily stopped by the result of disengaging in response to this, the second decoration game display unit 88 displays the result of disengaging and stops. After this, it becomes special game state.

  FIGS. 93 (e) to (h) show cases where the effect button 25 is not pressed in the skip effect. The skip effect is to be ended before the end of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game which is a special result, and the instruction display 94 or as shown in FIG. 93 (e) with the end of the skip effect. When the operation period display 93 is finished, the state of being variably displayed is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (f), until the variation time of the special view variation display game of the sub display symbol which is the special result is over, the decorative special view variation corresponding to the special view variation display game of the main display pattern The decorative feature variation display game displayed on the display game display unit 85 is stopped with the result of the disconnection. At this time, as in the case of displaying the usual result of losing on the special feature variation display game display unit 85, the identification information is stopped in the order of the left variation display area, the right variation display area, and the middle variation display area. Stop at the result as if it was scheduled to stop. In fact, the special display variation display game of the main display symbol is forced to be stopped due to the removal result by the end of the variation time of the special display variation display game of the sub display symbol which is a special result, but the forced stop is clearly It is made to stop so as not to show.

  Thereafter, in the stop time of the special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 93 (g), the main display symbol and the secondary display pattern are exchanged to display the display of the special figure variation display game display unit 85 and the second decoration game display unit 88. The special result is displayed on the decorative feature variation display game display unit 85 as shown in FIG. 93 (h), and the special game state is entered.

  It should be noted that the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are both in execution of the special view variation display game, and the sub display symbol ends before the main display symbol, and the result of the sub display symbol is a special result. If the condition for executing the skip effect is not satisfied, the display as shown in (e) to (h) of FIG. 93 is performed without performing the skip effect.

  FIG. 94 shows a time chart when the skip effect shown in FIG. 93 is performed. The main display symbol and the effect are shown in the upper row when the effect button 25 is pressed in the skip effect (FIGS. 93 (c) and (d)), and the lower portion is not pressed in the skip effect The case (FIGS. 93 (e) to (h)) is shown.

  Here, first, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are both being executed, and the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a special result and ends before the special figure 1 variation display game It has become. Then, with the main variation symbol being the special figure 1 variation display game and the sub variation symbol being the special figure 2 variation display game, skipping is made when the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game which becomes a special result becomes a predetermined time. The production is started (t11). This predetermined time is 3000 ms, which is the maximum execution time (t11 to t13) of the skip effect, and when the effect button is not pressed in the skip effect, the decorative feature variation display game display unit 85 stops the identification information by the shift result It is a time (4000 ms) which is combined with 1000 ms which is a time (t13 to t14) necessary for causing the light emission.

  When the skip effect (specific period) is started, a press instruction effect for displaying the instruction display 94 and the operation period display 93 is started (t11, FIG. 93 (b)). Then, when there is depression of the effect button 25 in the skip effect (t12), the main variation symbol and the sub variation symbol are replaced, and the ornament special symbol variation display on the ornament special symbol variation display game display unit 85 corresponding to the main variation symbol is displayed. The game is temporarily stopped, and the skip effect is ended (FIG. 93 (c)). The state of temporary stop is continued until the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped by the special result (t14).

  After that, as the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped by the special result, the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly stopped by the out result even if it does not reach the scheduled variation time (until t17) (T14, FIG. 93 (d)). The decorative special view variation display game display unit 85 ends the temporary stop state, and displays the identification information for a stop time over the stop time of the special view variation display game (t14 to t16). Further, the second decoration game display unit 88 stops and displays the outlier result in response to the special view 1 fluctuation display game which has become the sub fluctuation pattern. Then, the special game state is started along with the end of the stop time (t16).

  On the other hand, when the effect button 25 is not pressed in the skip effect, the skip effect (specific period) is ended along with the end of the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t13, FIG. 93 (e)), and the decorative special figure change display A fluctuation effect for stopping the fluctuation display of the game display unit 85 is performed (t13 to t14). In this fluctuation presentation, the identification information is stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, as in the case of the normal display of the disconnection result.

  Then, with the start of the stop time of the special figure variation display game, the offset result display is stopped and displayed on the special figure variation display game display unit 85, and the special result is displayed on the second ornament game display unit 88 (t14, FIG. 93) (F)). Thereafter, the display of the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decoration game display unit 88 are interchanged (t15, FIG. 93 (g)), and the special result is stopped in the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 The second decoration game display unit 88 displays the result of the shift. Then, the special game state is started along with the end of the stop time (t16).

  The special pattern variation display game display unit 85 shifts the time (t14 to t15) for displaying the special result on the second decorative game display unit 88 in a stopped state. If the time is the same as the time for displaying the result, it is possible to give an impression of the out result, and the interest when the special result is indicated is improved. In addition, it is possible to give an expectation that the special result changes even when the special view variation display game of the shift result is actually finished.

  Further, in the skip effect, when the display of the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decoration game display unit 88 are interchanged, the effect showing the movement shown in FIG. 92 is not performed. However, it may be shown that the decorative special-image variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol is stopped by performing an effect indicating a state of movement. In addition, when temporarily stopping with depression of the production button 25, the display of the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decoration game display unit 88 are not exchanged, and the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 It is also possible to temporarily stop the off result, and then switch the display of the decoration special game variation display game display unit 85 and the display of the second decoration game display unit 88.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), after temporarily stopping the special result in the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85, the fanfare effect at the start of the special gaming state is performed before the special figure variation display game ends. It is good. In this case, the temporary stopping time may be the same as the stopping time when the result of the special view variable display game becomes the special result.

  Moreover, although the case where a result becomes a big hit was shown in FIG. 93 and FIG. 94, also when it becomes a small hit, skip production can be performed similarly. In this case, as a result of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game to be a small hit, the result mode to be displayed on the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85 may be a result mode showing a small hit. It is good also as a result mode which shows a loss.

[Main processing]
In order to control the display on the display device 41 as described above, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 95 and timer interrupt processing (not shown). In the main processing, processing at the start of the program is performed first. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is inhibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, a power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

  After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) is performed to create input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. Reading of the input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in the effect button input process, processing when there is an input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed.

  Then, a hall / player setting mode process is performed to receive operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as brightness of LED and liquid crystal and volume, and change of brightness and volume of LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a random number updating process (step C11) is performed to update the random number for determining the details of the variation mode of the decorative special view variation display game.

  Then, the command from the game control apparatus 100 is analyzed and a reception command check process (step C12) for handling is performed, and effect display editing process (step C13) for editing the setting for controlling the progression of the effect and the drawing command ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (one frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated in a timing later than 1/60 seconds (frame Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that the frame switching timing is not reached (step C15; N), the processing in step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) and a decoration control process (step C17) for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 C18) A movable body control process (step C19) is performed to control the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44. Then, skip effect processing is performed to perform processing relating to skip effect (step C19), and display switching processing is performed to switch the main variation symbol and the sub variation symbol (step C20), and the WDT is cleared (step C8) Return.

[Skip production process]
FIG. 96 shows the skip effect process (step C19) in the main process described above. In the skip effect process, first, it is determined whether there is a skip effect flag set during execution of the skip effect (step C41). If there is a skip effect flag (step C41; Y), that is, if skip effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step C49. If the skip effect flag is not present (step C41; N), it is determined whether simultaneous change is in progress, that is, whether the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game are changing display. (Step C42).

  If simultaneous change is not in progress (step C42; N), the skip effect process is ended. In this case, the skip effect is not set. When the simultaneous change is in progress (step C42; Y), it is determined whether the sub display symbol is a hit (step C43). Here, it is determined whether the result of the special view variation display game of the special view currently set to the sub display symbol is a hit. The hit may include both a big hit and a small hit, but only one or the other.

  If the sub display symbol does not hit (step C43; N), the skip effect process is ended. When the sub display symbol is hit (step C43; Y), it is determined whether the sub display symbol stops first (step C44). Here, the remaining variation time of the special figure variation display game of the special figure of the main variation symbol and the remaining variation time of the special figure variation display game of the special figure of the sub variation pattern are compared, and the special figure of the special variation figure It is determined whether the remaining variation time of the figure variation display game is shorter. That is, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation display game of the special figure of the sub variation symbol to be hit is ended first, and the special figure variation display game of the special figure of the main variation symbol is forced to be stopped at the out result.

  If the sub display symbol does not stop first (step C44; N), the skip effect process is ended. When the sub display symbol stops first (step C44; Y), it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is a predetermined time (step C45). Here, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game of the special drawing of the sub fluctuation symbol is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is a predetermined time. This predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 94, is 3000 ms, which is the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t11 to t13 in FIG. 94), and the decorative special game variation display game when the effect button is not pressed in the skip effect The display unit 85 is a combined time (4000 ms) of 1000 ms which is the time required to stop the identification information (t13 to t14 in FIG. 94) according to the deviation result.

  If the remaining fluctuation time is not the predetermined time (step C45; N), the skip effect process is ended. When the remaining fluctuation time is a predetermined time (step C45; Y), the skip effect is set (step C46). As a result, a pressing instruction effect for displaying the instruction display 94 and the operation period display 93 is started. Next, the skip effect flag is set (step C47), and an initial value is set to the skip effect timer (step C48). The initial value set here is a value corresponding to the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t11 to t13 in FIG. 94).

  Then, if the skip effect timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C49), and it is determined whether the skip effect timer has become 0 (step C50). If the skip effect timer has not become 0 (step C50; N), the skip effect process is ended. When the skip effect timer becomes 0 (step C50; Y), that is, when the maximum execution time has elapsed without pressing the effect button 25 in the skip effect, the skip effect is ended (step C51), The skip effect flag is cleared (step C52), and the skip effect process is ended.

[Display switching process]
FIG. 97 shows the display switching process (step C20) in the main process described above. In this display switching process, first, it is determined whether there is a switching operation between the main display symbol and the sub display symbol (step C61). Here, the switching operation is a single pressing of the effect button 25, but the operation mode of the switching operation can be arbitrarily set. It is also possible to operate the touch panel 29.

  If there is a switching operation (step C61; N), it is determined whether or not both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are in the variation display (step C61; N) C62).

  If the simultaneous change is not in progress (step C62; N), the display switching process is ended. If simultaneous change is in progress (step C62; Y), it is determined whether there is a switching permission flag (step C63). The switching permission flag is a flag set in a state in which switching between the main display symbol and the sub display symbol is possible in accordance with the switching operation. If the switching permission flag is not present (step C63; N), the display switching process is ended. If the switch permission flag is present (step C63; Y), it is determined whether there is a skip effect flag set during execution of the skip effect (step C64).

  If there is no skip effect flag (step C64; N), the main display symbol is changed (step C70), an effect at the time of switching is set (step C71), and the display switching process is ended. As a result, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol are switched, and effects at the time of switching as shown in FIG. 92 are performed.

  On the other hand, when there is a skip effect flag (step C64; Y), that is, when skip effect is being executed, the main display symbol is changed to temporarily stop the main display symbol after the change (step C65). As a result, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), the decoration special figure fluctuation display displayed on the second decoration game display unit 88 corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game of the special drawing that was considered as the sub display symbol The game is displayed on the decorative feature variation display game display unit 85, and the result is temporarily stopped.

  Thereafter, the switching permission flag is cleared (step C66), the skip effect flag is cleared (step C67), the skip effect timer is cleared (step C68), and the display switching process is ended. By clearing the switching permission flag, it is possible to maintain the temporary stop state of the result on the decorative feature variation display game display unit 85 and to make it look as if the game is over and the result mode is displayed. Further, the skip effect is ended by clearing the skip effect flag and the skip effect timer. The switching permission flag is set again at the start of a new special-image variation display game.

  When there is no switching operation (step C61; N), it is determined whether the switching condition is satisfied (step C69). Here, the switching condition is that the special view variation display game of the main display symbol is not executed and only the special view variation display game of the secondary display symbol is executed, or the special view variation display of the secondary display symbol The conditions for the progress of the game, such as when the game is a special result, may be met. Of course, it is good also as conditions other than this, for example, when it will be in a reach state only with a subdisplay symbol. If the switching condition is not satisfied (step C69; N), the display switching process is ended. If the switching condition is satisfied (step C69; Y), the main display symbol is changed (step C70), an effect at the time of switching is set (step C71), and the display switching process is ended.

  In the skip effect process shown in FIG. 96, steps C42 to C45 are mentioned as conditions for setting the skip effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to execute the skip effect. Further, it may be set as the condition for setting the skip effect that the reach effect or the specific effect is not executed in the decorative special view variable display game corresponding to the main change symbol. Further, when one of the main variation symbol and the sub variation symbol is a hit, the special feature to be hit may be forcibly changed to the sub variation symbol to perform skip effect.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the case in which the sub display symbol is hit, and the skip effect may be performed when the main display symbol is hit and stops earlier than the sub display symbol. In this case, the skip effect may be performed even if the result of the main display symbol is out, and the skip effect may be performed when the variation pattern without reach is selected. In the skip effect, the result is temporarily stopped in response to the operation of the effect button 25, but the identification information may be sequentially stopped within a predetermined time in response to the operation of the effect button 25. That is, the effect may be as if the fluctuation time was shortened.

  Also, basically, the main display symbol and the sub display symbol can always be interchanged, but they may be interchanged only when executing the skip effect. In addition, although the setting of the main display symbol can be determined arbitrarily, for example, when turning on the power with clearing the RAM, the special figure 1 is used. However, if the change of the special view 2 is started first after that, only the special view 2 will be changed, and the main display symbol will be changed to the special view 2. In addition, after the end of the special game state, the special view derived from the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state as a main display symbol.

  Further, when the reach state is started in the decoration special figure variation display game of the second decoration game display unit 88, the main variation symbol and the sub variation symbol may be automatically interchanged. In this case, it may be set as a condition to replace that the decoration special figure fluctuation display game of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display section 85 is not in the reach state. Further, the variation patterns of the main display symbol and the sub display symbol may be compared, and the one having a high possibility of becoming a special result may be set as the main display symbol. In this case, when one side is a special result, the special figure fluctuation display game to be the special result regardless of the fluctuation pattern may be set as the main display symbol, or the special figure fluctuation display to be the special result It may be possible to execute the skip effect with the game as the sub display symbol.

  Moreover, the display mode in the display apparatus 41 is not restricted to what was mentioned above. For example, in this embodiment, the display of the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85 corresponding to the main display symbol is displayed larger than the display of the second decoration game display unit 88 corresponding to the sub display symbol. As shown in (a), both may be displayed in the same size, or the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol may not be displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the decorative special symbol variation display game corresponding to the main display symbol and the decorative special symbol variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol may be overlapped and displayed. In this case, some may be overlapped or all may be overlapped. In addition, the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the main display pattern is displayed to be superimposed on the front side of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub display pattern.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the color of the identification information of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the main display pattern and the color of the identification information of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub display pattern are different. As well. Here, the color of the identification information of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the sub display symbol located behind is lighter than the color of the identification information of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the main display pattern. Other than this, the identification information itself may be different between the main display symbol and the sub display symbol.

  In addition, reach production is done only concerning the decoration special figure fluctuation indicatory game which corresponds to the main indication design, but when it becomes reach state with both the main indication design and the secondary indication design, both reach production is indicated You may do it. In this case, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), the screen may be divided so that reach effects can be performed on both sides, or both reach effects may be superimposed and displayed.

  Alternatively, both reach effects may be integrated to show the results of both special view variation display games in the effect of one story. For example, as shown in FIGS. 98 (d) to 98 (g), in the battle effect against the enemy character, the result of the battle is derived in accordance with the derivation of the result of each special view variation display game, and You may make it show a result.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (d), reach production in which both reach productions are integrated is started based on reaching the reach state in both of the special figure fluctuation display games. Here, the special view variation display game of the main display symbol ends first, and in FIG. 98 (d), the battle corresponding to the special view variation display game is started as the first game, and FIG. 98 (e) The results are displayed as shown in. The result of the special view variation display game is an out result, and the result of the battle is a draw.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 98 (f), a battle corresponding to the special view variable display game of the sub display symbol is started as the second game, and the result is displayed as shown in FIG. 98 (g). The result of this special view variation display game is a special result, and the result of the battle is the victory of the allied character. Note that such an effect is not limited to when both are in the reach state, and can be performed even when one or both are not in the reach state. Also in the example shown in FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (g), the display unit is made to differ between the special view 1 and the special view 2 in the decoration special view variable display game display unit 85 and the second decoration game display unit 88. You may or may not make a difference.

  From the above, a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the winning on the start winning opening is executed, and a special game state advantageous to the player is obtained when the result of the variable display game is a special result. In the game machine to be generated, as the start winning opening, the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97), and to the first start winning opening The first variable display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of executing the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball, and the variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening Second variable display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of executing the second variable display game as a game, a display device 41 capable of displaying effects related to the game, and effect control means (for controlling the effects of the game And the first variation display game and the second variation display game can be executed simultaneously, and the effect control means is configured to display one variation display of the first variation display game and the second variation display game. The game is mainly displayed on the display device 41, and the variable display game to be mainly displayed can be changed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Therefore, in the gaming machine capable of executing different special view variation display games at the same time, the special view variation display game mainly displayed by the player can be selected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, as the establishment of the predetermined condition, in addition to the operation of the operation means (effect button 25 and touch panel 29) operable by the player, the special display variation display game of the main display symbol is not executed and the sub display The conditions regarding the progress of the game, such as the situation where only the special figure variation display game of the symbol is executed or the special figure variation display game of the sub display symbol becomes a special result, may be mentioned. Of course, it is good also as conditions other than this, for example, when it will be in a reach state only with a subdisplay symbol.

  Further, the game ball having flowed into the predetermined inflow port 91 is provided with sorting means (winning device 90) for alternately distributing the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game are simultaneously executed, and the interest of the special view variation display game mainly displayed by the player can be selected to improve the interest of the game.

  The first variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) performs execution control by the second variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) when performing execution control of the first variation display game. When the second variable display game being played is the special result, it is possible to end the first variable display game performing the execution control as a result other than the special result, the second variable display game The execution control means, when performing execution control of the second variable display game, when the first variable display game for which execution control is being performed by the first variable display game execution control means becomes a special result, It is possible to end the second variable display game in which the execution control is performed as a result other than the special result, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) And the second variable display game is executed at the same time, and when the result of the variable display game from which the result is derived is a special result, the result in the variable display game from which the result is derived first It is possible to change the variable display game to be mainly displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in a specific period set between a predetermined time before the timing when L is derived and the timing when the result is derived. Therefore, when the result of one of the special figure variation display games is derived, the special figure variation display game mainly displayed by the player can be selected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) will, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition in the specific period, set the identification information corresponding to the fluctuation display game to be mainly displayed after the change to the temporary stop state. Therefore, it is possible to execute such an effect as if the special view variation display game is stopped based on the operation of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Also, when the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes the variable display game to be displayed mainly based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition in the specific period, the variable display game to display mainly at least until the end of the variable display game. Will prohibit the change of Therefore, it is possible to execute such an effect as if the special view variation display game is stopped based on the operation of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, an output aspect of the symbol determination signal will be described. The symbol determination signal is output to an external device outside the gaming machine 10 as the variation display of the special view variation display game is stopped. In the external device, it is possible to grasp that the special figure variation display game is stopped based on the symbol determination signal and the result is derived.

  FIG. 99 shows an example of the output mode of the symbol determination signal. As shown in FIG. 99 (a), the output of the symbol determination signal is started based on the change from the state in which the special view 1 variation display game is in the variation display to the stop state (t31). Here, since the result of the special view 1 fluctuation display game is an out result, 600 ms is set as the stop time (t31 to t34). In addition, as a stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game, even if it is neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, in the case of a high probability final fluctuation when it is not a high probability final fluctuation, In the case of a small hit, the display time of 600 ms is set to. Further, in the case of the high probability final fluctuation, the display time of 2000 ms is set regardless of the result.

  The symbol determination signal is turned on (t31) as the special view 1 variation display game is stopped (t31), and turned on for 128 ms and then turned off (t32). Then, after the OFF state is continued for 64 ms, the output ends (t33). After the end of the output, the OFF state is continued. The time required to output one symbol determination signal is 192 ms, and the output is completed within the stop time regardless of the time selected as the stop time of the special view variation display game.

  Also, when the special view 2 variation display game changes from being displayed to being stopped, the output of the symbol determination signal is started based on the stopping condition (t35). Also in this case, the symbol determination signal is turned ON along with the stop of the special view 2 variation display game (t35), and is turned OFF after continuing the ON state for 128 ms (t36). Then, the output is ended after continuing the OFF state for 64 ms (t37). After the end of the output, the OFF state is continued.

  FIG. 99 (b) shows the case where the other special figure fluctuation display game is stopped while the symbol determination signal is being output for the special figure fluctuation display game stopped earlier. In this example, the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game are both being executed, and the special view 1 variation display game is stopped first (t41). Based on this, a symbol determination signal is output (t41 to t44). The special figure 2 fluctuation display game is stopped while this symbol determination signal is being output (t42). In this case, since the symbol determination signal for the special view 1 variation display game is being output, the output of the symbol determination signal for the special view 2 variation display game is in a standby state. Then, when the output of the symbol determination signal for the special view 1 variation display game is ended, the output of the symbol determination signal for the special view 2 variation display game is started (t44). Although the symbol determination signal is output twice in a row, one symbol determination signal finally has an OFF state period (for example, t43 to t44), so the external device performs two symbol determination signals. Each is independently detectable.

  Although the case where the special view 1 variation display game is stopped first is shown here, the same applies to the case where the special view 2 variation display game is stopped first. Also, even when the other special figure variation display game is stopped during the OFF state (for example, t43 to t44) during the output of the symbol determination signal, the new symbol determination signal is output after the period of the OFF state is over. Is started.

  In FIG. 99 (c), the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are simultaneously executed, and the other special figure variation is based on the fact that the special result is derived in one special figure variation display game. It showed the case where the display game was forced to be stopped due to the disconnection result. Also in this case, two symbol determination signals are continuously output.

  In this example, both the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game are being executed, and the special result is derived in the special view 2 variation display game (t51). Based on this, the special view 1 variation display game is forcibly stopped at the result of the disconnection (t51). The result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit that makes a special result, 2000 ms is set as the stop time (t51 to t57), and the special game state is started after the end of the stop time (t57). Further, since the result is a result of losing the special view 1 fluctuation display game, 600 ms is set as the stop time (t51 to t56).

  The first symbol output signal is started based on the stop of the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game (t51). When the output of the first symbol determination signal is finished, the second output is started (t53). The output of the two symbol determination signals is finished within the stop time of the special view 2 variation display game which has become a special result. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the output of the symbol determination signal from being performed during the special gaming state, and it is possible to prevent the external device from grasping as if the special figure variation display game is stopped during the special gaming state.

  In addition, to the external device, it is possible to output 1 signal of big hit, 2 signals of big hit, 3 signals of big hit and 4 signals of big hit as external information regarding the special game state. The jackpot 1 signal is output (turned on) during the first special game state based on the jackpot and during the second special game state based on the small hits 1 to 4. The jackpot 2 signal is output during the first special game state, and is not output during the second special game state. However, in the case of the first special gaming state based on the 2R probability variation D1 generated in the low probability state, it is OFF. In addition, the jackpot 2 signal is also output when the time variation operation state of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (during common power support). That is, it forms the specific information that is output when it is in the specific gaming state. In this case, the specific gaming state is a high probability state and a short time state, but only one of them may be generated. Even in this case, two jackpots are output during the specific gaming state. Also good.

  The jackpot 3 signal is output during the first special game state, and is not output during the second special game state. In the first special game state based on the 2R probability variation D1 generated in the high probability state, it is OFF. The big hit 4 signal is not output during the first special game state, but is output during the second special game state. In the external device, the presence / absence and type of execution of the special game state and the presence / absence of the short time state are grasped based on the 1 large hit signal, the 2 large hit signal, the 3 large hit signal and the 4 large hit signal to display information.

  In this example, the special result is derived and the special game state is started in a state that is not a time saving state, and before the start of the special game state, the big hit 1 to 4 signals are in the OFF state, and the special game state is started. At the same time, the jackpot 1 to 4 signals are turned on (t57). Based on this, the external device can recognize that it is in the special game state. Therefore, the output of the symbol determination signal is ended before it is determined that the external device is in the special game state by any of the big hit 1 to 4 signals. In other words, it can be said that the output of information (big hit 1 to 4 signals) for grasping that the external device is in the special game state is on standby until the output of the symbol determination signal ends.

  In the external device, it is determined that the special view variation display game is stopped and the result is derived based on the change of the symbol determination signal to the ON state (the rise of the signal), so at least the second ON condition of the symbol determination signal The change to t (t53) may be performed before grasping that the external device is in the special game state by either within the stop time or the 1 to 4 signals of the big hit.

  FIG. 100 shows the output mode of the information output to the outside at the end of the time saving state. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is set to be in a high probability state and a short time state from the end of the special game state to the 50th special view change display game. As shown in FIG. 100 (a), the special figure variation display game being the 49th in a state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed as the 48th special figure variation display game from the end of the special gaming state The variable display game is started (t61). Thereafter, the special figure 2 variation display game is started as the 50th special figure variation display game (t62).

  Here, when it is possible to simultaneously execute the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability state is low when the 50th special view variation display game is ended. If it is changed to the state, the determination is made in the high probability state even to the other special figure fluctuation display game started during the execution of the one special figure fluctuation display game, and the high probability over 50 times It becomes possible to execute the game in the state. Therefore, as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game can be executed simultaneously, after the 50th special view variation display game is determined in the high probability state , It is necessary to be in a low probability state by the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game, here, it is changed to the low probability state immediately after finishing the processing at the start of the 50th special drawing fluctuation display game (T 62).

  With the termination of the high probability state and the time saving state, the test signal indicating the gaming state is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, and is in the state indicating the low probability state and the time saving no state (t62). Specifically, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF. The test signal is for making it possible to grasp the gaming state with the trial shooting test device when testing the gaming machine, and the output state is changed according to the change of the actual gaming state.

  On the other hand, the jackpot 2 signal that can be turned ON when in the time saving state or the special game state is kept in the ON state until the end of the 50th special view fluctuation display game, and then turned OFF. (T64). The big hit 1 to 4 signals are used to enable collection and display of information on a game in an external device provided in a game arcade, and are output modes in accordance with the convenience of display on the external device.

  The information display device provided above the gaming machine as one of the external devices displays information such as the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game and the number of derivation of special results based on the big hit 1 to 4 signals, symbol determination signals, etc. It is like that. In this information display device, the hit in the non-time-saving state is regarded as the first hit, and the first-time hit including the first hit ends the time-saving state by execution of a predetermined number of times of the special view variation display game It is possible to display the number of big hits up to the end as the number of consecutive villas, but it is convenient for displaying the number of consecutive villas if it is turned ON until the end of the 50th special map variation display game where the two large jacks become a predetermined number. Is good.

  FIG. 100 (b) shows the case where the 50th special-pattern variation display game has a special result. The game state is a high probability state and a short time state (t72) from the end of the special game state until the 50th special map variation display game is started. In this state, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on to indicate that it is in the short time state, and the test signal is also turned on to indicate that it is in the high probability state and the short time state. In addition, the jackpot 1, 3 and 4 signals that can be turned on during the special game state are turned off.

  Then, when the 50th special figure change display game is started, the gaming state is set to the low probability state and the time saving state (t72). Along with this, the test signal is turned off, but the big hit 2 signal is kept on. Although the 51st special figure fluctuation display game is started during the 50th special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure fluctuation display game is determined in the low probability state.

  After that, a special result is derived in this 50th special-pattern variation display game (t 74). Along with the derivation of the special result, the 51st special figure fluctuation display game, which is the other special figure fluctuation display game, is forcibly stopped at the result of being removed. In addition, as the special result is derived in the 50th special figure variation display game, the symbols corresponding to the 50th special figure variation display game and the 51st special figure variation display game forcibly stopped. A determination signal is output (t74, t75).

  The external device grasps the stop of the special figure variation display game based on the symbol determination signal and determines that the special figure variation display game is stopped during the time saving state since the big hit 2 signal is in the ON state. Thereafter, since the jackpot 1, 3 and 4 signals are turned ON with the start of the special game state, it is grasped that the special game state is started also in the external device. At this time, it is determined that the special figure variation display game ended immediately before as described above is in the time saving state, so it is determined that the current big hit is a continuous big hit and the number of consecutive times is added Do.

  During the 50th special figure variation display game, the effect of performing the final special figure variation display game in the high probability state is also performed in the production, and a big hit occurs in this special figure variation display game In this case, it is normal for the player to recognize that the player has hit a jackpot, and the player's recognition can be matched with the display on the information display device. Assuming that the big hit 2 signal changes according to the game state as well as the test signal, the information display device is in a state indicating that the time saving state is not at the end of the 50th special view fluctuation display game. Then, the display is performed as the first hit, and the display becomes different from the player's recognition, which reduces the interest of the game.

  In addition, by making the change of the big hit 2 signal like this embodiment, the special figure fluctuation display game which is ended during the 50th special figure fluctuation display game execution in the example of FIG. It becomes possible to treat it as a jackpot jackpot even when the special map variation display game of () has a special result. Further, in the effect control device 300 as well, with regard to the special view change display game which is ended during the execution of the 50th special view change display game and the 50th special view change display game, if the result is a special result, Treat it as a grand jackpot.

  From the above, a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the winning on the start winning opening is executed, and a special game state advantageous to the player is obtained when the result of the variable display game is a special result. In the game machine to be generated, as the start winning opening, the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97), and to the first start winning opening 36 The first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball, and the fluctuation based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening The second variable display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of executing the second variable display game as the display game, and an output means (game control apparatus 100) for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine, First The dynamic display game and the second variable display game can be executed simultaneously, and the first variable display game execution control means is controlled by the second variable display game execution control means when executing control of the first variable display game. If the second variable display game in which execution control is being performed has a special result, forced stop control is possible which causes the first variable display game in which the execution control is being performed to be stopped as a result other than the special result, The second variation display game execution control means, when performing execution control of the second variation display game, the first variation display game of which execution control is being performed by the first variation display game execution control means is a special result In the event that the second variable display game under execution control is executed as a result other than the special result, forced stop control is possible, and the output means is a variable display game. The stop information can be output to the outside in response to stopping, and when the forcible stop control is performed, the first variation display game and the second variation are performed by the start of the special game state based on the derivation of the special result. The stop information corresponding to each of the display games is output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience in the grasp of the information in the external device.

  The game control apparatus further comprises specific gaming state generation means (game control device 100) for generating a specific gaming state during a period until the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the special gaming state, and the output means is in the specific gaming state In this case, the specific game state generation means can output the specific information to the outside, and the specific game state generation means ends the specific game state with the start of the variable display game which is the predetermined number of times, and the output means is the variable display game which is the predetermined number of times With the end of the process, the output of the specific information is ended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience in the grasp of the information in the external device.

  In the above embodiment, the high probability state and the short time state are ended at the start of the 50th special figure change display game, but the high probability state is ended at the start of the 50th special figure change display game. The state may be ended at the end of the 50th special-pattern variation display game. Then, the big hit 2 signal that forms the specific information may be in the ON state in the time saving state, and may be in the OFF state in the time saving state. By doing this as well, as with the external device shown in FIG. 100, the 50th special view variation display game and the 50th special view variation display game ending during the special view variation display game are special. Even when the result is reached, it becomes possible to treat it as a jackpot big hit.

  That is, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 which can convert the gaming ball into a closed state in which the gaming ball is hard to win or can not win, and an open state in which the gaming ball is easier to win or can win than the closed state; Operation control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the operation state in any one of the normal operation state and the short-time operation state in which winning is easier than the normal operation state, and after the end of the special game state A specific gaming state generation means (game control device 100) for generating a specific gaming state over a period until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed, and a period until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed after the special gaming state is over And a probability setting unit configured to set the probability that the result of the variable display game becomes a special result to a high probability state higher than the normal probability state. The high probability state is set with the start of the skill state, and the normal probability state is shifted with the start of the variable display game a predetermined number of times, whereas the operation control means is in the time-saving operation state with the start of the specific gaming state. The control of may be started, and transition to the normal operation state may be made based on the predetermined number of times of the variable display game ending the specific gaming state ending.

  Next, monitoring of the out number error based on the detection of the gaming ball by the out switch 98 will be described. The out switch 98 is a sensor that detects a safe ball that has won in each winning opening and an out ball that is discharged from the out opening 30 a without winning in each of the winning openings. That is, all the game balls which have been fired to the game area 32 and finished the game are detected. An out number error is monitored on the basis of the number of detected gaming balls at the out switch 98 and the number of detected gaming balls at each winning opening.

  Specifically, it is determined that an out number error has occurred when the number of detection of game balls at each winning opening is greater than a predetermined number of detections of the game balls by the out switch 98. The number of detected game balls at the out switch 98 is the total number of out balls and safe balls, and the number of detected game balls at each winning opening is the number of safe balls. Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the detected number of gaming balls at each winning opening hardly exceeds the detected number of gaming balls at the out switch 98, and if exceeded, it is assumed to be abnormal. However, it is assumed that the number of detections of gaming balls at each winning opening exceeds the number of detections of gaming balls at the out switch 98 due to the timing of detection, the timing of resetting of the counter holding the number of detections, etc. It is determined that the out number error has occurred when the predetermined number is increased.

  As a case where such an out number error occurs, a cheating act by a line fishing ball is assumed. The injustice by the line fishing ball is an action of causing the detection by the prize sensor to be illegally performed by causing the gaming ball or metal piece attached with the thread to enter the winning opening and operating the thread. When such a fraudulent act is performed, the detected number of gaming balls at the winning opening increases, which may cause the number of detected gaming balls at the out switch 98 to be exceeded.

Status display edit output processing
FIG. 101 shows the state display edit output process (step X116) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In this state display editing output process, first, it is determined whether there is an input on the out switch (step X801). If there is no input on the out switch (step X801; N), the process proceeds to step X809. If there is an input to the out switch (step X801; Y), the value of the out counter area is loaded (step X802), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X803), and it is determined whether it overflows (step X803). Step X 804).

  If no overflow has occurred (step X804; N), the updated value is saved in the out counter area (step X805). Thereby, the gaming balls discharged from the gaming machine are counted, and the counting result is held. That is, the game control device 100 forms a total discharge number counter (out counter) that counts the number detected by the discharge sensor (out switch 98). Thereafter, a difference calculation process is performed to calculate a difference necessary to determine the number-of-outs error (step X806), and the process proceeds to step X809.

  When an overflow occurs (step X804; Y), the value of the difference counter area is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X807), 0 is saved in the out counter area (step X808), and step X809. Migrate to The difference counter area is an area for storing the value of the difference calculated in the difference calculation process, and the total winning number counter area is an area for storing the total number of gaming balls that have won in each winning opening. When the value of the out counter area overflows, the values of the total winning number counter area and the out counter area are set as described above. The value of the difference counter area is maintained. As a result, the detection of the out number error is not inconvenient.

  Thereafter, a base value calculation process is performed to calculate a base value from the detected number of gaming balls with the out switch 98 and the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area (step X809). The process is performed (step X810), and the state display edit output process is ended.

[Difference calculation processing]
FIG. 102 shows the difference calculation process (steps X365 and X806) in the above-mentioned winning number counter updating process and the state display editing and outputting process. In this difference calculation process, first, the value of the out counter area is loaded (step X 821), the value of the total winning number counter area is loaded (step X 822), and the difference is calculated (step X 823). In the calculation of the difference, a value obtained by subtracting the value of the out counter area from the value of the total winning number counter area is calculated as the difference. However, when the calculation result is less than 0, the calculated difference may be treated as being zero.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated difference is larger than the value of the difference counter area (step X824). If the calculated difference is larger than the value of the difference counter area (step X824; Y), the calculated difference is saved in the difference counter area (step X825), and the difference calculation process is ended. If the calculated difference is not larger than the value of the difference counter area (step X824; N), the difference calculation process is ended without saving the calculated difference in the difference counter area. Therefore, the maximum value of the difference is held in the difference counter area. That is, the game control apparatus 100 calculates the difference number which is the value where the value of the total winning number counter exceeds the value of the total discharge number counter, and the difference which can hold the difference number calculated by the calculating means Make a counter.

[Out number error monitoring process]
FIG. 103 shows the out number error monitoring process (step X810) in the state display editing output process described above. In this out number error monitoring process, first, the value of the difference counter area is loaded (step X841), and it is determined whether the value of the difference counter area is larger than the out number error determination number (here, 13) (step X842). ).

  Although the out number error occurrence determination number can be set to an arbitrary value, it is larger than the winning number (for example, 10) which is the end condition of the round in consideration of the special gaming state in which continuous winning is most likely to occur. It is preferable to set a value having a margin larger than the number of winning combinations which is the end condition of the round in consideration of winning in other holes at the same time. In addition to this, it is preferable to set the value with a margin in consideration of the time from winning to detection by the out switch 98 and the possibility of false recognition of the detection signal due to noise. In the present embodiment, the out number error determination number is set to 13 taking these into consideration.

  If the value of the difference counter area is larger than the out number error occurrence determination number (step X842; Y), that is, if it is determined that the out number error has occurred, the value of the difference counter region is limited to the out number error occurrence determination number (Step X843) The initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the out number error notification timer area (step X844). Next, an out number error occurrence command is prepared (step X845), an out number error occurrence flag is prepared as an incorrect flag (step X846), and the prepared incorrect flag is compared with the value of the out number error occurrence flag area ( Step X853).

  On the other hand, when the value of the difference counter area is not larger than the out number error occurrence determination number (step X842; N), that is, when the out number error does not occur, the out number error notification timer is not 0 and -1 updated. To do (step X 847). The minimum value of the out number error notification timer is set to zero.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the out number error notification timer is 0 (step X848), and if the value is not 0 (step X848; N), that is, time is not up, the out number error monitoring process is ended. Do. If the value is 0 (step X848; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, prepare the out number error cancellation command (step X849), and set the out number error cancellation flag as the illegal flag. To prepare (step X850). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the out number error notification timer becomes 0 (step X851).

  If it is the moment when the value of the out number error notification timer becomes 0 (step X 851; Y), that is, if the value of the out number error notification timer becomes 0 in the current out number error monitoring process, the difference counter area Is cleared (step X 852), and the prepared incorrect flag is compared with the value of the out number error flag area (step X 853). In addition, when the value of the out number error notification timer is not the moment when it becomes 0 (step X 851; N), that is, when the out number error notification timer value becomes 0 in the previous out number error monitoring process, The incorrect flag is compared with the value of the out number error flag area (step X853).

  Then, if the prepared incorrect flag and the value of the out number error flag area match (step X853; Y), the out number error monitoring process is ended. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the out number error flag area (step X853; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the out number error flag area (step X854), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step X855), the out number error monitoring process is ended. By the above processing, the out number error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the occurrence of the out number error, and the out number error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the cancellation of the out number error. The start and end of the error notification will be set. That is, the game control device 100 is a winning detection sensor (starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, starting opening 3 switch 97a, upper large winning opening switch 38a, lower large winning opening switch 39a, winning opening switch 35a) and discharge The control means performs control based on the detection signal from the sensor (out switch 98).

  FIG. 104 shows an example of the change of the value in each counter area for detecting the out number error. The total winning number counter area, the out counter area, and the difference counter area are areas provided in the RAM 111C of the game control apparatus 100, and are cleared when the power is turned on with the RAM clear, as shown in a1 of FIG. It is set to 0. In the case of power on without clearing the RAM, the value at the time of power shutdown is maintained, but even in this case, it may be cleared.

  Then, the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1 based on a detection signal from one of the winning openings (a2), and the difference is calculated accordingly. Here, since the value of the out counter area is 0, the difference is 1, and 1 is set in the difference counter area since it is larger than 0 which is the value of the difference counter area before updating.

  Thereafter, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98 (a3). Since the safe ball that has won in the winning opening is also detected in the out switch 98, the gaming ball is normally detected by the out switch 98 if the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1 due to the game ball winning. The value of the out counter area is updated by +1. The difference is calculated as the value of the out counter area is updated. Here, since both the value of the total winning number counter area and the value of the out counter area are 1, the difference is 0 and is smaller than 1 which is the value of the difference counter area before updating, so the value of the difference counter area is updated Not 1 is maintained.

  Next, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98 (a4). In this update, the out switch 98 detects an out ball discharged from the out port 30a without winning in any winning port. The difference is calculated along with this update, but since the difference is -1 and is smaller than the value of the difference counter area before the update, the value of the difference counter area is maintained.

  After this, the value of the total winning number counter area based on the detection signal from the winning opening is continuously updated (a5 to a7). Every time this updating is performed, the difference is calculated, but the difference becomes 2 at a7 and becomes larger than 1 which is the value of the difference counter area before updating, so the value of the difference counter area is updated to 2. As described above, when only the value of the total winning number counter area increases, it may occur even in a state where the gaming ball has won in the winning opening in a short time as in the special gaming state and has not been detected by the out switch 98 yet. Also, it is conceivable that only the detection at the winning opening occurs due to a cheating action by the fishing line. In this manner, the value of the total winning number counter area increases and the difference increases, and when the value of the difference exceeds the out number error determination number (for example, 13), it is determined that the out number error.

  FIG. 104 (b) shows the case where an out number error occurs. In this example, first, the value of the total winning number counter area is 52, the value of the out counter area is 40, and the value of the difference counter area is 12 (b1). Then, the value of the total winning number counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the winning opening, the value of the difference counter area becomes 13 (b2), and the total winning number counter area is further calculated based on the detection signal from the winning opening The value is updated by +1, and the value of the difference counter area becomes 14, which exceeds 13 which is the number of judgments of occurrence of an error (b3). As a result, it is determined that an out number error has occurred, and an out number error notification state occurs in which an abnormality notification is performed. The out number error notification state is continued for a predetermined time (here, 60000 ms) from the time when it is determined that the out number error has occurred.

  After it is determined that the out number error has occurred, the value of the difference counter area is changed to 13 which is the out number error occurrence determination number (b4). Here, after that, the value of the total winning number counter area is further updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the winning opening (b5). The difference is calculated based on this update, and since the value is larger than the value of the difference counter area before the update, 15 which is the value of the calculated difference is set in the difference counter area. With the setting of this difference, it is determined that the out number error has occurred again, and the notification period of the out number error informing state is reset (extended).

  After it is determined that the out number error has occurred, the value of the difference counter area is changed to 13 which is the out number error occurrence determination number (b6). After that, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98 to calculate the difference, but again the difference is 14 and the out number error is determined again (b7).

  As described above, after it is determined that the number-of-outs error has occurred, the value of the difference counter area is set as the number-of-outs-error determination count, and monitoring of abnormality continues even during the notification period. If it is determined that the detection signal from the winning opening is further input after it is determined that the error has occurred, it is possible to immediately determine that the out number error. Furthermore, when it is determined that the number-of-outs error has occurred, when the detection signal from the winning opening is further input, the notification period is extended to take a long time to cancel the number-of-outs error. The out number error is generated when the detection signal from the winning opening is abnormally high, and there is a high possibility that cheating is being made at the winning opening. If the detection signal from the winning opening is generated even after the occurrence of the out number error, it is highly likely that the cheating is continued. In such a case, the out number error notification state is prevented from being canceled easily to prevent the fraudulent action from being continued.

  After it is determined that an out number error has occurred, the value of the difference counter area is changed to 13 which is the out number error occurrence determination number (b8). Thereafter, based on the detection signal from the out switch 98, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 and the difference is calculated (b9). Here, the difference is 13 and it is not determined that an out number error has occurred.

  Then, the state in which it is not determined that the number-of-outs error has occurred continues, and when it is determined that the number-of-outs error has finally occurred (b7), the out number error notification state is canceled and the notification period is finish. With the cancellation of the out number error notification state, the value of the difference counter area is cleared to 0 (b10). However, the value of the total winning number counter area and the value of the out counter area are not cleared.

  Thereafter, when the detection signal from the winning opening or the detection signal from the out switch 98 is input, the difference is calculated. Here, the difference is calculated based on the input of the detection signal from the out switch 98, and 9 of the calculated difference is set in the difference counter area. Since the difference counter area is updated when the calculated difference number is larger than the held value, updating such that the value decreases is not performed. For this reason, the value of the area of the difference counter is cleared upon cancellation of the out number error notification state, and the abnormal state is temporarily canceled. Also, by clearing only the value of the difference counter area without clearing the value of the total winning number counter area or the value of the out counter area, the difference number at the subsequent timing (b11) is reflected in the difference counter area It is like that. It should be noted that all of the value of the total winning number counter area, the value of the out counter area and the value of the difference counter area may be cleared to 0 with cancellation of the out number error notification state.

  FIG. 104 (c) shows the case where the value in the out counter area overflows. The out counter area of this embodiment can take a value of 0 to 255, and returns to 0 when +1 is updated in the state of 255 which is the maximum value. In this example, first, the value of the out counter area is 254 (c1), the detection signal from the out switch 98 is input, and the value of the out counter area is 255 which is the maximum value (c2). From this state, the detection signal from the out switch 98 is further input, and the value of the out counter area overflows to 0 (c3). Along with the overflow of the out counter area, 5 which is the value of the difference counter area is set in the total winning number counter area (d4). The value of the difference counter area is maintained as it is.

  If the value of the total winning number counter region is maintained as it is when the value of the out counter region overflows, the value of the total winning number counter region immediately exceeds 13 which is the number of out errors determined number It is determined that the number error has occurred, which causes inconvenience. However, if the value of the total winning number counter area is also cleared to 0, the difference is also 0, which causes a problem that detection of the occurrence of the out number error is delayed. Therefore, by setting the value of the difference counter area as the value of the total winning number counter area, the state of the difference before the occurrence of the overflow is maintained, and the monitoring of the occurrence of the out number error can be continued without change before and after the overflow. ing.

  FIG. 104 (d) shows the case where the value of the total winning number counter area overflows. The total winning number counter area of the present embodiment can take a value of 0 to 255, and returns to 0 when +1 is updated in the state of 255 which is the maximum value. In this example, first, the value of the total winning number counter area is 254 (d1), the detection signal from the winning opening is input, and the value of the total winning number counter area is 255 which is the maximum value (d2). From this state, the detection signal from the winning opening is further input, and the value of the total winning number counter area overflows and becomes 0 (d3). Along with the overflow of the total winning number counter area, the value 5 of the difference counter area is set in the total winning number counter area (d4). Also, the value of the difference counter area is maintained as it is, and the value of the out counter area is cleared and set to zero.

  By doing this, as in the case where the value in the out counter area overflows, the state of the difference before the occurrence of the overflow is maintained, and the occurrence of the out number error can be monitored without change before and after the overflow. There is.

  From the above, in the gaming machine that executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a game area where the game ball can flow down 32 and a game area 32 provided in the game area where game balls can be won (the first start winning hole 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the second start winning hole 97, the first special fluctuation winning device 38, the second special Fluctuation winning device 39, general winning opening 35), and a winning detection sensor (starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, starting opening 3 switch 97a, upper opening winning opening switch) that can detect the game ball that has won in the winning area 38a, lower large winning opening switch 39a, winning opening switch 35a), a discharge sensor (out switch 98) capable of detecting gaming balls discharged from the game area 32, a winning detection sensor and a discharge sensor Control means (game control apparatus 100) for performing control based on a detection signal from the server, and the control means is a total prize number counter (game control apparatus 100) for counting the number of detections by the prize detection sensor; Total discharge number counter (game control device 100) for counting the number detected by the sensor, and calculation means (game control device for calculating the difference number in which the value of the total winning number counter exceeds the value of the total discharge number counter 100), and when the difference number exceeds a predetermined number, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the fraud can be detected reliably.

  Further, the control means is provided with a difference counter (game control device 100) capable of holding the difference number calculated by the calculation means, and the difference counter has the maximum value of the calculated difference number until the difference number exceeds a predetermined number. When the total discharge number counter is reset, the value of the difference counter is set in the total winning number counter, and the value of the difference counter is kept held. Therefore, the fraud can be detected reliably.

  In addition, the control means is configured to execute abnormality notification for notifying occurrence of abnormality when the difference number exceeds a predetermined number for a predetermined notification period, and resets the value of the difference counter with the end of the notification period. I am trying to do it. Therefore, with the end of the notification period, the abnormal state is reliably released.

  Further, the control means keeps the values of the total winning number counter and the total discharging number counter even if the value of the difference counter is reset with the end of the notification period. Therefore, after the end of the notification period, the actual difference number is reflected on the difference counter.

  Further, the control means can calculate the difference number by the calculation means based on the value of the total winning number counter or the total discharging number counter being calculated, and can hold the difference number in the difference counter, and the value of the difference counter Is configured to notify occurrence of an abnormality when the value exceeds a predetermined number, and the value of the difference counter is set to the predetermined number based on the determination that the abnormality has occurred. Therefore, it becomes possible to immediately detect another abnormality after detecting an abnormality, and to detect a fraudulent act reliably. In the above embodiment, the predetermined number set in the difference counter area based on the occurrence of an abnormality is the out number error determination number, but may be a value other than this.

  Further, the control means is configured to execute abnormality notification for notifying occurrence of abnormality over a predetermined notification period, and the calculation means when the value of the total winning number counter or the total discharge number counter is updated even during the notification period. Thus, the difference number can be calculated and the difference number can be held in the difference counter. Therefore, it becomes possible to immediately detect another abnormality after detecting an abnormality, and to detect a fraudulent act reliably.

  Further, when it is determined that the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined number during the notification period and the abnormality occurs, the control means extends the notification period based on the determination. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the continuation of the fraudulent act by preventing the notification of the abnormality from being ended easily. Here, the notification period may be extended by clearing the remaining notification period based on the occurrence of a new abnormality and setting the notification period again, or in addition to the remaining notification period, a predetermined notification period May be set. Also, the time extended based on the occurrence of a new abnormality may be the same regardless of the number of times the extension is performed, or may be different depending on the number of times the extension is performed, for example, the extension The longer the extension time may be, the greater the number of times the event is performed.

  The difference calculation process may be performed only in the winning number counter update process, and may not be performed in the state display edit output process. The difference calculation process (step X806) in the state display edit output process is performed when there is an input to the out switch 98, and only a change in the value in the direction in which the out number error does not occur occurs. There is no problem even if the difference calculation process is omitted.

  Also, when the value of the total winning number counter area or the out counter area overflows, the value of the out counter area is set to 0, but the value of the difference counter area may be set to the value of the out counter area as well. good.

  In addition, although the value of the difference counter area is maintained at the maximum value compared with the value before updating, the calculated difference may be set as it is. Also, when it is determined that an out number error has occurred, the value of the difference counter area is changed to the out number error occurrence determination number, but may be changed to a smaller value or even if it is cleared to 0 good. Furthermore, when it is determined that the number-of-outs error has occurred, the value of the total number-of-winnings counter area, the value of the out counter area, and the value of the difference counter area may all be changed to the number of out errors occurrence determination number It may be good, it may be changed to a smaller value, or it may be cleared to zero.

  Although the values of the total winning number counter area, the value of the out counter area, and the value of the difference counter area are updated even in the out number error notification state, the values of all the areas are updated in the out number error notification state. You may not do it. Further, in the out number error notification state, the payout based on the winning on the winning opening may not be performed.

  Further, the out number error determination number may be changed according to a predetermined condition. For example, the out number error determination number may be changed according to the gaming state. As the gaming state, there are no time saving state, time saving state, special gaming state and the like. In the time saving state, the frequency of winning is higher than that in the time saving state, and in the special game state, the frequency of winning is higher than that in the time saving state, so it is easy to be judged as an out number error. For this reason, in the time saving state or the special gaming state, the number-of-outs error occurrence determination number may be set larger than that in the time saving no state. Furthermore, the number of out errors occurrence determination may be made more in the special gaming state than in the time saving state.

  In this case, when transitioning to the gaming state in which the number-of-outs error occurrence determination number is small, if the value of the difference counter area before the transition exceeds the number-of-outs error occurrence determination number in the gaming state after transition, There is a risk that it may be determined that an out number error has occurred. Therefore, the value of the difference counter area is changed to a value equal to or less than the number-of-outs-error determination number in the gaming state after the transition with the transition.

  In addition, the value of the total winning number counter area, the value of the out counter area, and the value of the difference counter area may all be cleared to 0 every predetermined time. The fixed time is, for example, a time earlier than the time until the value of the out counter area reaches the upper limit when the gaming ball is continuously fired.

  In the above embodiment, the total winning number counter, the out counter, and the difference counter are used. However, the out number error may be detected by one counter. In this case, the counter is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98, and the counter is updated by -1 based on the detection signal from the winning opening. It is determined that an out number error has occurred when the value of

  Also, in this case, since the detection signal from the out switch 98 is usually larger than the detection signal from the winning opening, it becomes more difficult to detect the occurrence of the out number error as time goes on starting from the state of the counter 0 . Therefore, the upper limit value of the counter may be set to a not very large value (for example, 255), and an opportunity to be set to 0 due to an overflow may occur at a constant frequency. In addition, the counter may be cleared to 0 each time a predetermined period has elapsed.

  In addition, when the difference exceeds the out number error occurrence determination number, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, but when the difference becomes more than the out number error occurrence determination number, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. The determination method and the number-of-outs determination may be arbitrarily selected. Furthermore, when processing is performed by comparing the acquired value with the determination value without being limited to the determination of the out number error, it may be determined whether the value exceeds the determination value or not. It is good also as a judgment standard.

First Modification
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of the present variation, it is possible to select a variation pattern for executing skip effects in the game control apparatus 100.

  105 and 106 show fluctuation patterns of the special figure fluctuation display game. FIG. 105 shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in which types of fluctuation patterns and selection rates in the normal gaming state (low probability state) are defined. Note that a variation pattern table common to the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game is used. FIGS. 105 (a) to 105 (c) are the same as FIGS. 105 (a) to 105 (c) of the first embodiment. The gaming machine of the present modification includes the big hit variation pattern table 2 of FIG. 105 (d) and the small hit variation pattern table 2 of FIG. 105 (e).

  The big hit variation pattern table 1 of FIG. 105 (b) and the big hit variation pattern table 2 of FIG. 105 (d) are different in that the big hit variation pattern table 2 of FIG. 105 (d) has variation patterns without reach. Similarly, small hit variation pattern table 1 in FIG. 105 (c) and small hit variation pattern table 2 in FIG. 105 (e) have variation patterns without reach in small hit variation pattern table 2 in FIG. 105 (e). The point is different.

  FIG. 106 shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in which the types of fluctuation patterns and the selection rates in the specific gaming state (high probability state) are defined. Note that a variation pattern table common to the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game is used. FIGS. 106 (a) to (c) are the same as FIGS. 106 (a) to (c) of the first embodiment. The gaming machine of this modification includes the big hit variation pattern table 2 of FIG. 106 (d) and the small hit variation pattern table 2 of FIG. 106 (e).

  The big hit variation pattern table 1 of FIG. 106 (b) and the big hit variation pattern table 2 of FIG. 106 (d) are different in that the big hit variation pattern table 2 of FIG. 106 (d) has variation patterns without reach. Similarly, small hit variation pattern table 1 in FIG. 106 (c) and small hit variation pattern table 2 in FIG. 106 (e) have variation patterns without reach in small hit variation pattern table 2 in FIG. 106 (e). The point is different.

  The variation pattern table 2 shown in FIGS. 105 (d), (e), 106 (d), and (e) can be selected when the other special figure variation display game is being executed. In this situation, it is possible to select a short-time fluctuation pattern without reach, which increases the possibility that the special view fluctuation display game to be hit will stop earlier than the other special view fluctuation display game, and the skip effect is It is easy to do.

  Also, the fluctuation time of this fluctuation pattern without reach is 4000 ms. This fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 94, is 3000 ms, which is the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t11 to t13 in FIG. 94), and the decoration special view fluctuation display game when the effect button is not pressed in the skip effect. The display unit 85 has a time equal to the combined time (4000 ms) of 1000 ms which is the time required to stop the identification information (t13 to t14 in FIG. 94) according to the shift result.

  When this fluctuation pattern is selected, the effect control device 300 immediately starts the skip effect with the start of the special view fluctuation display game. In addition, when the variation pattern is selected and the skip effect is performed but the effect button 25 is not operated, the special result is stopped in the stop mode in which the identification information is stopped similarly to the stop mode in the case of the out result. It will be. As a result, when the special pattern for which the variation pattern is selected is the main variation symbol, the skip effect is started in a state in which the identification information is changing at high speed on the decorative feature variation display game display unit 85.

[Special map information setting process]
In the gaming machine of this modification, in place of the special view information setting process shown in FIG. 48, the special view information setting process shown in FIG. 107 is performed. In this special drawing information setting process, in either the low probability state or the high probability state, when the result is a big hit or a small hit (step Y 404; Y, step Y 405; Y, step Y 414; N) It is determined whether or not the special view variation display game of is in the process of variation (step Y415).

  If the other special-image variation display game is not in the process of variation (step Y415; N), the process moves to step Y412. When the other special figure fluctuation display game is fluctuating (step Y415; Y), it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time of the other special figure fluctuation display game is a predetermined time or more (step Y416). This predetermined time is, as shown in FIG. 94, the maximum execution time of the skip effect (t11 to t13 in FIG. 94) and the decorative feature variation display game display unit 85 when the effect button is not pressed in the skip effect. Then, it is the time which put together the time (t13-t14 of FIG. 94) required to stop identification information by a shift | offset | difference result.

If the remaining fluctuation time of the other special-pattern fluctuation display game is not equal to or longer than the predetermined time (step Y416; N), the process moves to step Y412.
In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time of the other special figure fluctuation display game is the predetermined time or more (step Y416; Y), the converted value to the second half is added to the first half offset data to convert the value (step Y417) The conversion value to the second table is added to the second half offset data to convert the value (step Y418), and the process proceeds to step Y412.

  Thereby, in the situation where the skip effect can be executed, the fluctuation pattern table 2 of FIGS. 105 (d), (e), 106 (d) and (e) is set according to the probability state and the result. . In these fluctuation pattern tables 2, it is possible to select a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 4000 ms without reaching.

  It should be noted that even if the other special figure variation display game is not in the process of variation (step Y415; N) or the remaining variation time of the other special figure variation display game is not longer than the predetermined time (step Y416; N), If there is the other starting memory, the process may proceed to step Y416 since the other special figure variation display game is continuously executed. Further, in the fluctuation pattern table 2 shown in FIGS. 105 (d), (e), 106 (d), and (e), it is possible to select only the fluctuation patterns without reach.

Second Modified Example
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of the present modification, a fixed grace period is provided until the calculation of the difference when there is a winning.

  FIG. 108 (a) shows an example of change in value in each counter area in the first embodiment described above. This example has the same contents as FIG. 104 (a). As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1 based on the fact that the gaming ball has won in any of the winning openings and the detection signal is input (a2). It is calculated. Here, since the value of the out counter area is 0, the difference is 1, and 1 is set in the difference counter area since it is larger than 0 which is the value of the difference counter area before updating. Thereafter, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98 (a3). The difference is calculated as the value of the out counter area is updated. Here, since both the value of the total winning number counter area and the value of the out counter area are 1, the difference is 0 and is smaller than 1 which is the value of the difference counter area before updating, so the value of the difference counter area is updated Not 1 is maintained.

  Since the safe ball that has won in the winning opening is also detected by the out switch 98, if the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1 due to the game ball winning in the abnormal state, the game ball is then switched out. By detecting at 98, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1. Therefore, in view of this series of detection, since the total winning number counter area and the out counter area are both updated by +1, the substantial difference number will not change from the value before winning.

  However, since there is a fixed distance from the winning opening switch of each winning opening to the out switch 98, it takes a certain time from the input of the detection signal from the winning opening switch to the input of the detecting signal from the out switch 98. Therefore, when the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1, the difference number is incremented by one (a2), and then the maximum value is maintained even if the value of the out counter area is incremented by one (a3) The value of is maintained at 1, which causes a difference from the substantial difference number.

  Therefore, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1 based on the fact that the gaming ball has won in any of the winning openings and the detection signal is input. (B2) The grace period (here, 5000 ms) is set without calculating the difference immediately. Then, when the detection signal from the out switch 98 is input within the grace period, the calculation of the difference based on the winning (b2) to the previous winning opening is not performed. As a result, the value of the difference counter area can be made a value corresponding to the substantial difference (b3).

  In addition, after setting the grace period by updating the value of the total winning number counter by +1 based on the game ball winning in any winning opening and inputting the detection signal (b4), it is out within the grace period If the detection signal from the switch 98 is not input, the difference is calculated, and if the calculation result is larger than the value of the difference counter area, the calculation result is stored in the difference counter area (b6). As a result, the value of the difference counter area increases when there is an illegal act that only the detection by the winning opening switch occurs, such as an illegal act by a thread fishing ball, and the number-of-outs error occurrence judgment number (for example, 13) If it exceeds, the out number error will be judged.

[Winning number counter update processing]
In this modification, in place of the winning number counter updating process shown in FIG. 27, a winning number counter updating process shown in FIG. 109 is performed. In this winning number counter update process, instead of the difference calculation process (step X365), the initial value of the grace timer is saved in the grace timer area (step X871), and the value of the in-counter area is updated by +1 (step X872) .

  The grace timer is for managing the grace period, and here, 5000 ms is set as an initial value. This time is a sufficient time from detection of the game ball by the winning opening switch of each winning opening to detection by the out switch 98. The in-counter area is a counter for counting the number of winning prizes for which the calculation of the difference is suspended, and, as described later, a prize is obtained based on the detection with the same number of out switches 98 as the in-counter area. It is determined that the game ball has been discharged.

Status display edit output processing
Also, instead of the state display edit output process shown in FIG. 101, the state display edit output process shown in FIG. 110 is performed. In this state display edit output process, it is first determined whether the grace timer is 0 (step X881). If it is 0 (step X881; Y), the process proceeds to step X801. In this case, the grace timer is already zero and outside the grace period.

  If the grace timer is not 0 (step X881; N), that is, within the grace period, the grace timer is updated by 1 (step X882), and it is determined whether the grace timer has become 0 (step X883) . If the grace timer has not become 0 (step X883; N), that is, if the grace period has not ended, it is determined whether there is an input to the out switch (step X884). If there is no input on the out switch (step X 884; N), the process proceeds to step X 801.

  If there is an input to the out switch (step X 884; Y), the value in the in counter area is updated by −1 (step X 885), and it is determined whether the value in the in counter area becomes 0 (step X 886). Then, if the value of the in-counter area is not 0 (step X886; N), the process proceeds to step X801. If the value of the in-counter area is 0 (step X 886; Y), that is, if the discharge of gaming balls corresponding to the number of prizes for which the calculation of the difference is suspended is detected, the grace timer area is cleared to 0. Then (step X887), the process proceeds to step X801. This ends the grace period.

  On the other hand, when the grace timer becomes 0 (step X883; Y), that is, when the grace period ends, difference calculation processing is performed (step X888). This difference calculation process is the process shown in FIG. Thereafter, the in-counter area is cleared to 0 (step X889), the grace timer area is cleared to 0 (step X890), and the process moves to step X801.

  In this state display edit output process, the difference calculation process (step X806) which was performed when there is an input at the out switch (step X801; Y) and the out counter area does not overflow (step X805; N) is not performed It is like that. The difference calculation process (step X806) is performed when the value of the out counter area increases and changes in the direction in which the out number error does not occur. Of course, difference calculation processing may be performed.

  In the above description, the difference calculation process is not performed in the winning number counter update process, and the detection at the winning opening switch is not immediately reflected in the difference number, but the difference number in the winning number counter update process The time of reflecting the calculation result in the difference counter area may be postponed. Then, if the same number of out switches 98 are detected during the grace period as the number of winning prizes being suspended, the calculation result is discarded.

  Further, when the value of the in-counter area exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 20), the difference calculation process may be performed without setting the grace period. If a new winning combination occurs during the grace period, the grace period will be newly set from that winning combination, but there is a risk that fraudulent detection may be delayed if the period in which the winning combination is not reflected in the difference number becomes too long. Therefore, when the grace period is reset a predetermined number of times, the difference calculation process may be performed without setting the grace period to detect an abnormality.

  Further, a winning ball out switch for detecting the gaming ball when the gaming ball detected by the winning opening switch is discharged may be provided separately from the out switch 98. In the above example, the detection with the out switch 98 does not distinguish whether it is due to the game ball (safe ball) that has won the winning opening or the game ball discharged from the out port 30a (out ball) For example, even when the game ball discharged from the out port 30a within the grace period is detected by the out switch 98 after the detection by the winning port switch, it is regarded as normal. By providing a winning ball out switch, it is possible to confirm the discharge of the gaming ball that has won the winning hole, and after detection by the winning hole switch, if it is detected by the winning ball out switch within the grace period, it is regarded as normal. In this way, it is possible to more accurately determine cheating.

  The out switch 98 may also detect the game ball detected by the winning ball out switch, or may not detect the game ball detected by the winning ball out switch. When the out switch 98 also detects a game ball detected by the winning ball out switch, only the detection by the out switch 98 is counted in the out counter area. If the out switch 98 does not detect the game ball detected by the winning ball out switch, a value obtained by adding both the detection by the out switch 98 and the detection by the winning ball out switch is used in the out counter area. Make it count. In addition, the winning ball out switch may be for collectively detecting the discharge of the gaming balls that have won a prize in each winning opening, or detecting the discharging of the winning gaming balls individually for each winning opening, Also good.

  From the above, in the gaming machine that executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a game area where the game ball can flow down 32 and a game area 32 provided in the game area where game balls can be won (the first start winning hole 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the second start winning hole 97, the first special fluctuation winning device 38, the second special Fluctuation winning device 39, general winning opening 35), and a winning detection sensor (starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, starting opening 3 switch 97a, upper opening winning opening switch) that can detect the game ball that has won in the winning area 38a, lower large winning opening switch 39a, winning opening switch 35a), a discharge sensor (out switch 98) capable of detecting gaming balls discharged from the game area 32, a winning detection sensor and a discharge sensor Control means (game control apparatus 100) for performing control based on a detection signal from the server, and the control means is a total prize number counter (game control apparatus 100) for counting the number of detections by the prize detection sensor; Total discharge number counter (game control device 100) for counting the number detected by the sensor, and calculation means (game control device for calculating the difference number in which the value of the total winning number counter exceeds the value of the total discharge number counter 100) and is configured to notify occurrence of abnormality when the difference number exceeds a predetermined number, and until the predetermined grace period elapses from the detection by the prize detection sensor, the prize detection sensor Thus, the detection of is not reflected in the difference number. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a difference with the substantial difference number, to detect a fraudulent action reliably, and to prevent an erroneous detection.

  In addition, the control means ends the grace period when the discharge sensor detects the same number of detections as the number of detections by the winning detection sensor which is delaying reflection on the difference number during the grace period. It will be done. Therefore, the grace period can be prevented from continuing beyond necessity.

  In addition, the control means postpones reflection on the difference number when the detection number in the discharge sensor in the grace period does not reach the detection number in the prize detection sensor which postpones reflection on the difference number. A value obtained by subtracting the number detected by the discharge sensor in the grace period from the number detected by the winning detection sensor is reflected in the difference number. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect an injustice in which only the detection by the winning detection sensor occurs.

Third Modified Example
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-mentioned first modification, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of the present modification, a fixed grace period is provided until the calculation of the difference when there is a winning.

[Winning number counter update processing]
In this modification, in place of the state display edit output process shown in FIG. 110, the state display edit output process shown in FIG. 111 is performed. In this state display edit output process, when the grace timer becomes 0 and the grace period ends (step X 883; Y), the value of the in-counter area is first loaded instead of the difference calculation process (step X 888). (Step X901) The loaded value and the value of the difference counter area are added (Step X902), and the addition result is saved in the difference counter area (Step X903).

  As a result, the number of winnings that has not been detected by the out switch 98 corresponding to the detection by the winning opening switch is added to the value of the difference counter area. Even in this case, when an illegal act is being performed where only the detection by the winning opening switch occurs, such as an illegal act by a thread fishing ball, the value of the difference counter area increases, and the number-of-outs error occurrence judgment number If (for example, 13) is exceeded, it will be determined that the out number error. Further, since it is not necessary to provide a total winning number counter area or an out counter area, and further, there is no need to calculate a difference, it is possible to reduce the burden of control regarding detection of fraudulent activity.

  When the value of the in-counter area exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 20), the value of the in-counter area may be added to the value of the difference counter area without setting the grace period. If a new winning combination occurs during the grace period, the grace period will be newly set from the winning combination, but there is a risk that fraud detection may be delayed if the period not reflected in the difference number is too long. If the grace period is reset a predetermined number of times, the difference calculation process may be performed without setting the grace period, and abnormality detection may be performed.

  In addition, although the value of the in-counter area is added to the difference counter area, the values of the in-counter area remaining in a plurality of grace periods are added up, but the in-counter area remaining in one grace period is added. The occurrence of an abnormality may be determined based only on the value of. One grace period is a period from when the grace period is started without the grace period until the grace timer becomes 0 or is cleared to 0. If a new winning occurs during the grace period and a new grace period is set from that winning combination, the grace timer before and after the new winning combination is a series of grace periods since the grace timer does not become 0. It will be a grace period of times.

  From the above, in the gaming machine that executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a game area where the game ball can flow down 32 and a game area 32 provided in the game area where game balls can be won (the first start winning hole 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the second start winning hole 97, the first special fluctuation winning device 38, the second special Fluctuation winning device 39, general winning opening 35), and a winning detection sensor (starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, starting opening 3 switch 97a, upper opening winning opening switch) that can detect the game ball that has won in the winning area 38a, lower large winning opening switch 39a, winning opening switch 35a), a discharge sensor (out switch 98) capable of detecting gaming balls discharged from the game area 32, a winning detection sensor and a discharge sensor Control means (game control apparatus 100) for performing control based on a detection signal from the server, the control means sets a predetermined grace period from detection by the prize detection sensor, and during the grace period the discharge sensor The occurrence of an abnormality can be detected based on the absence of detection. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the fraudulent action of causing the winning detection sensor to output the detection signal improperly.

  Also, the control means resets the grace period based on the detection by the prize detection sensor newly during the grace period, and the number of detections by the discharge sensor during the grace period is the start and the resumption of the grace period. If the number of detections of the winning detection sensor that triggered the setting is insufficient, the occurrence of an abnormality is notified based on the fact that the number of shortages is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the fraudulent action of causing the winning detection sensor to output the detection signal improperly.

  Further, the number of shortages in a plurality of grace periods is totaled, and the occurrence of an abnormality is notified based on the total number becoming a predetermined number or more. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the fraudulent action of causing the winning detection sensor to output the detection signal improperly.

Fourth Modified Example
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the method of setting the value when the counter overflows. Also, the difference counter area is not used.

[Winning number counter update processing]
In this modification, in place of the winning number counter updating process shown in FIG. 27, a winning number counter updating process shown in FIG. 112 is performed. In this winning number counter updating process, when overflow of the total winning number counter area occurs (step X363; Y), a difference calculating process is performed (step X911). In the difference calculation process, as shown in FIG. 113, the process (steps X824 and X825) related to the difference counter area performed in the difference calculation process of FIG. 102 is not performed.

  Referring back to FIG. 112, after the difference calculation process (step X911), the difference calculation result is updated by +1 (step X912). Since the winnings causing the overflow are not reflected in the calculation of the difference, the difference calculation result is updated by +1 to be reflected in the difference number. Then, it is determined whether the difference calculation result is larger than 0 (step X913).

  If the difference calculation result is larger than 0 (step X913; Y), the difference calculation result is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X915). If the difference calculation result is not greater than 0 (step X913; N), the difference calculation result is set to 0 (step X914), and the difference calculation result is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X915). Thereafter, 0 is saved in the out counter area (step X367), and the processes after step X368 are performed.

  The difference calculation process (step X365) which has been performed when the total winning number counter area does not overflow (step X363; N) is not performed here, but is performed in the out number error monitoring process shown in FIG. ing.

Status display edit output processing
Also, in place of the state display edit output process shown in FIG. 101, the state display edit output process shown in FIG. 114 is performed. In this state display edit output process, when an overflow of the out counter area occurs (step X804; Y), a difference calculation process is performed (step X921). This difference calculation process is the process shown in FIG. 113 described above.

  Referring back to FIG. 114, after the difference calculation process (step X921), the difference calculation result is updated by −1 (step X922). In the calculation of the difference, the detection at the out switch 98 that has caused the overflow is not reflected. Here, the difference calculation result is updated by -1 to be reflected in the difference number. Then, it is determined whether the difference calculation result is larger than 0 (step X923).

  If the difference calculation result is larger than 0 (step X923; Y), the difference calculation result is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X925). If the difference calculation result is not greater than 0 (step X923; N), the difference calculation result is set to 0 (step X924), and the difference calculation result is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X925). After that, 0 is saved in the out counter area (step X 808), and the processes after step X 809 are performed.

  The difference calculation process (step X806) which has been performed when the out counter area does not overflow (step X804; N) is not performed here, but is performed in the out number error monitoring process shown in FIG. .

  By the above processing, even if the total winning number counter area or the out counter area overflows, the information of the difference before the overflow is taken over, and it is possible to continuously monitor fraudulent activity. Further, when the difference calculation result is not larger than 0 (steps X913, X923; N), the difference calculation result is set to 0, so that fraudulent activity can be detected with certainty. That is, since the number of detections by the out switch 98 is larger than the number of detections by the winning opening switch when the game is normally performed, the difference is largely separated from the number of out errors determined. When cheating is started in this state, the period until the difference reaches the out number error occurrence judgment number becomes long and there is a possibility that detection of cheating may be delayed, but the difference calculation result is not larger than 0. Setting the result to 0 makes it possible to detect fraudulently.

[Out number error monitoring process]
Further, the out number error monitoring process shown in FIG. 115 is performed instead of the out number error monitoring process shown in FIG. In this out number error monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the out number error notification timer is 0 (step X931), and the value of the out number error notification timer is 0 (step X931; Y), That is, when the out number error does not occur, the difference calculation processing is performed (step X933). This difference calculation process is the process shown in FIG. 113 described above.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the difference calculation result is larger than the out number error occurrence determination number (step X 934). If the difference calculation result is larger than the out number error occurrence determination number (step X 934; Y), that is, the out number error occurs. If it is determined that the process is performed, the process from step X844 is performed. If the difference calculation result is not larger than the out number error occurrence determination number (step X 934; N), that is, if the out number error does not occur, the processing from step X 847 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the value of the out number error notification timer is not 0 (step X931; N), that is, when the out number error occurs and notification is performed, the value of the total winning number counter area or the value of the out counter area is set. It is determined whether there is a change (step X932). Then, if there is a change in the value of the total winning number counter area or the value of the out counter area (step X932; Y), the processing of step X933 and thereafter is performed. In this case, when the difference calculation result is larger than the out number error occurrence determination number (step X934; Y), the notification of the out number error is reset. If there is no change in the value of the total winning number counter area or the value of the out counter area (step X932; N), the processing of step X847 and thereafter is performed. Note that the determination of whether the value of the out number error notification timer is 0 may not be performed (step X931).

  In addition, if it is the moment when the value of the out number error notification timer becomes 0 (step X851; Y), that is, the value of the out number error notification timer becomes 0 in the current out number error monitoring process, the out number error When it is released, 0 is saved in the total winning number counter area (step X935), 0 is saved in the out counter area (step X936), and the processes after step X853 are performed.

  FIG. 116 shows an example of the change of the value in each counter area for detecting the out number error. In this modification, since the difference counter area is not provided, the column of differences means the result of difference calculation. When the values of the total winning number counter area and the out counter area are 0 as shown by a1 in FIG. 104 (a), the difference is also 0 (a1). When the detection signal from any winning opening is input from this state, the value of the total winning number counter is updated by +1 (a2). Here, since the value of the out counter area is 0, the difference calculation result is 1.

  Thereafter, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98 (a3). Here, since the value of the total winning number counter area and the value of the out counter area are both 1, the difference calculation result is 0. Next, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98 (a4). In this update, the out switch 98 detects an out ball discharged from the out port 30a without winning in any winning port. By this update, the difference calculation result is -1. Thereafter, when the value of the total winning number counter area is continuously updated based on the detection signal from the winning opening (a5 to a7), the difference calculation result also increases accordingly. Thus, the difference calculation result is a value corresponding to the value of the counter at the time of calculation.

  FIG. 116 (b) shows the case where an out number error occurs. In this example, first, the value of the total winning number counter area is 52, the value of the out counter area is 40, and the value of the difference counter area is 12 (b1). Then, the value of the total winning number counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the winning opening, and the difference calculation result becomes 13 (b2), and the value of the total winning number counter area is further based on the detection signal from the winning opening The value is updated by +1, and the difference calculation result becomes 14, which exceeds 13 as the number-of-outs determination result occurrence number (b3). As a result, it is determined that an out number error has occurred, and an out number error notification state occurs in which an abnormality notification is performed. The out number error notification state is continued for a predetermined time (here, 60000 ms) from the time when it is determined that the out number error has occurred.

  In the present modification, since the difference counter area is not used, the process of setting the difference as the number-of-outs determination count is not performed after it is determined that the number-of-outs error has occurred. If the value of the total winning number counter area or the out counter area does not change in the out number error notification state, the difference is not calculated (b4).

  Furthermore, the value of the total winning number counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the winning opening in the out number error notification state (b5). The difference is calculated based on this update, and the difference calculation result is 15. Since the difference calculation result exceeds 13 which is the out number error occurrence determination number, it is determined that the out number error has occurred again, and the notification period of the out number error notification state is reset (extended). Thereafter, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98 to calculate the difference, but the difference calculation result is also 14 and it is determined again that the out number error (b7).

  Then, the value of the out counter area is updated by +1 based on the detection signal from the out switch 98 and the difference is calculated (b9), but in this case, it is determined that the difference calculation result is 13 and the out number error has occurred I will not. Thus, the state where it is not determined that the out number error has occurred continues, and when it is determined that the out number error has finally occurred (b7), the out number error notification state is canceled and the notification period Ends. With the cancellation of the out number error notification state, the value of the total winning number counter area and the value of the out counter area are cleared to 0 (b10).

  FIG. 116 (c) shows the case where the value in the out counter area overflows. The out counter area of the present modification is assumed to have a value of 0 to 255, and returns to 0 when +1 is updated in the state of 255 which is the maximum value. In this example, first, the value of the out counter area is 254 (c1), the detection signal from the out switch 98 is input, and the value of the out counter area is 255 which is the maximum value (c2).

  When the detection signal from the out switch 98 is further input from this state, the value of the out counter area overflows, and the corresponding processing is performed. First, the difference is calculated without updating the out counter area (c3). Then, the difference calculation result is updated by -1 (c4), and it is determined whether the difference calculation result is larger than zero. Here, since the difference calculation result is 0 or less, the difference calculation result is set to 0 (c5). After that, 0 which is the difference calculation result is set in the total winning number counter area, and the out counter area is cleared to 0 (c6).

  If the maximum possible value of the total winning number counter area is larger than the maximum possible value of the out counter area, the difference calculation result in the process when the value of the out counter area overflows may be larger than 0. Conceivable. FIG. 116 (d) shows an example of such a case.

  In this example, first, the value of the total winning number counter area is 260, the value of the out counter area is 254 (d1), the detection signal from the out switch 98 is input, and the value of the out counter area is maximum. It has a value of 255 (d2). When the detection signal from the out switch 98 is further input from this state, the value of the out counter area overflows, and the corresponding processing is performed. First, the difference is calculated without updating the out counter area (d3). Then, the difference calculation result is updated by -1 (d4), and it is determined whether the difference calculation result is greater than zero. Here, since the difference calculation result is greater than 0, the difference calculation result is directly set in the total winning number counter area, and the out counter area is cleared to 0 (c5).

  FIG. 116 (e) shows the case where the value of the total winning number counter area overflows. The total winning number counter area of the present embodiment can take a value of 0 to 255, and returns to 0 when +1 is updated in the state of 255 which is the maximum value. In this example, first, the value of the total winning number counter area is 254 (e1), the detection signal from the winning opening is input, and the value of the total winning number counter area is 255 which is the maximum value (e2).

  If the detection signal from the winning opening is further input from this state, the value of the total winning number counter area overflows, and the corresponding processing is performed. First, the difference is calculated without updating the value of the total winning number counter area (e3). Then, the difference calculation result is updated by +1 (e4), and it is determined whether the difference calculation result is larger than zero. Here, since the difference calculation result is greater than 0, the difference calculation result is directly set in the total winning number counter area, and the out counter area is cleared to 0 (e5).

  If the maximum possible value of the out counter area is larger than the maximum possible value of the total winning number counter area, the difference calculation result in the process when the value of the total winning number counter area overflows becomes 0 or less It is also conceivable. FIG. 116 (f) shows an example of such a case.

  In this example, first, the value of the total winning number counter area is 254, the value of the out counter area is 260 (f1), the detection signal from the winning opening is input, and the value of the total winning number counter area is The maximum value is 255 (f2). If the detection signal from the winning opening is further input from this state, the value of the total winning number counter area overflows, and the corresponding processing is performed. First, the difference is calculated without updating the total winning number counter area (f3). Then, the difference calculation result is updated by +1 (f4), and it is determined whether the difference calculation result is larger than zero. Here, since the difference calculation result is 0 or less, the difference calculation result is set to 0 (f5), 0 which is the difference calculation result is set in the total winning number counter area and the out counter area is cleared to 0 (f6).

  From the above, in the gaming machine that executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a game area where the game ball can flow down 32 and a game area 32 provided in the game area where game balls can be won (the first start winning hole 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the second start winning hole 97, the first special fluctuation winning device 38, the second special Fluctuation winning device 39, general winning opening 35), and a winning detection sensor (starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, starting opening 3 switch 97a, upper opening winning opening switch) that can detect the game ball that has won in the winning area 38a, lower large winning opening switch 39a, winning opening switch 35a), a discharge sensor (out switch 98) capable of detecting gaming balls discharged from the game area 32, a winning detection sensor and a discharge sensor Control means (game control apparatus 100) for performing control based on a detection signal from the server, and the control means is a total prize number counter (game control apparatus 100) for counting the number of detections by the prize detection sensor; Total discharge number counter (game control device 100) for counting the number detected by the sensor, and calculation means (game control device for calculating the difference number in which the value of the total winning number counter exceeds the value of the total discharge number counter 100) and is configured to notify occurrence of abnormality when the difference number exceeds a predetermined number, and when either the total winning number counter or the total discharge number counter overflows, the difference number is calculated. If the difference number is greater than 0, the difference number is set as the value of the total winning number counter and the value of the total discharge number counter is set to 0. If the difference number is less than 0, the total winning number is set. Counter's The fact that as both set to 0 the value of the total discharge number counter with. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect the fraudulent action of causing the winning detection sensor to output the detection signal improperly. Also, the counter can monitor fraudulent activity continuously before and after overflow.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of. Also, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be combined appropriately and applied.

  Further, it should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

10 gaming machine 32 gaming area 35 general winning opening (winning area)
35a winning opening switch (winning detection sensor)
36 1st start winning opening (winning area)
36a Start port 1 switch (prize detection sensor)
37 Regular fluctuation winning device (winning area)
37a Start opening 2 switch (prize detection sensor)
38 1st Special Variation Prize Winning Device (Prize Zone)
38a Upper winning opening switch (winning detection sensor)
39 2nd Special Variation Prize Winning Device (Prize Zone)
39a Lower prize winning opening switch (winning detection sensor)
97 2nd start winning opening (winning area)
97a Start port 3 switch (prize detection sensor)
98 Out switch (discharge sensor)
100 game control device (control means, total winning number counter, total discharging number counter, calculating means)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
A game area where game balls can flow down,
A winning area provided in the gaming area and capable of winning a gaming ball;
A prize detection sensor capable of detecting a game ball that has won in the prize area;
A discharge sensor capable of detecting game balls discharged from the game area;
And control means for performing control based on detection signals from the winning detection sensor and the discharge sensor.
The control means
A total winning number counter that counts the number of detections by the winning detection sensor;
A total discharge number counter that counts the number of detections by the discharge sensor;
Calculating means for calculating a difference number which is a value where the value of the total winning number counter exceeds the value of the total discharging number counter,
Configured to notify occurrence of an abnormality when the difference number exceeds a predetermined number;
A game machine characterized in that the detection by the prize detection sensor is not reflected in the difference number until a predetermined grace period elapses from the detection by the prize detection sensor. The control means
The grace period is ended when, during the grace period, the discharge sensor detects the same number as the number detected by the prize detection sensor which is delaying the reflection on the difference number, the grace period is ended. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein The control means
In the grace period, when the number of detections in the discharge sensor does not reach the number of detections by the prize detection sensor which postpones the reflection on the difference number, the reflection on the difference number is postponed The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein a value obtained by subtracting the number detected by the discharge sensor in the grace period from the number detected by the winning detection sensor is reflected in the difference number.

Images